Yamaha RX-V567 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V567

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

AV Receiver English

En 2

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

Features and capabilities ...................................................3

About this manual............................................................. 4

Supplied accessories......................................................... 4

Part names and functions.................................................. 5

Front panel........................................................................5

Rear panel.........................................................................6

Front panel display ........................................................... 7

Remote control .................................................................8

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers ..........................................................9

Speaker channels and functions........................................ 9

Speaker layout ................................................................ 10

Connecting speakers and subwoofer ..............................11

Connecting external components....................................14

Cable plugs and jacks .....................................................14

Connecting a TV monitor...............................................15

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices............18

Connecting video cameras and portable audio players .. 22

Transmitting input A/V to external components ............ 22

Connecting the FM/AM antennas ..................................23

Set up the speaker parameters automatically

(YPAO) .............................................................................. 24

PLAYBACK

Basic playback procedure ...............................................29

Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 29

Changing input settings with a single key

(SCENE function) ............................................................30

Registering input sources/sound field program .............. 30

Enjoying sound field programs....................................... 30

Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders...... 30

Sound field programs .....................................................33

FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 35

Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 35

Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ... 36

Recalling a preset station................................................ 38

Clearing preset stations .................................................. 38

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only) ..................................... 38

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 40

Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ................. 40

Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 40

Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components....... 43

Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver ........................................................................... 43

Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 43

Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 44

SETUP

Configuring the settings specific for each input source

(Option menu) .................................................................. 45

Option menu display and setup ...................................... 45

Option menu items ......................................................... 45

Setting various functions (Setup menu)......................... 49

Setup menu display and settings .................................... 49

Setup menu items ........................................................... 50

Manages settings for speakers........................................ 50

Setting the audio output function of this unit................. 54

Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 55

Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 58

Setting the sound field program ..................................... 59

Prohibiting setting changes ............................................ 59

Setting sound field program parameters ....................... 60

CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 61

Parameters usable in certain sound field programs ........ 61

Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 62

Controlling other components with the remote

control ............................................................................... 63

Keys connecting external components ........................... 63

Default remote control code settings.............................. 63

Registering remote control codes for external

component operations .................................................... 64

Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 65

Extended functionality that can be configured

as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ................................ 66

Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............... 66

Setting the impedance of speakers

(U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................. 66

Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using

multiple Yamaha receivers ............................................. 66

High quality playback using bi-amplification

connections .................................................................... 67

Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits .......... 67

Changing FM/AM frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)..................................... 67

Initializing various settings for this unit ........................ 67

Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 68

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting ............................................................... 71

General........................................................................... 71

HDMI™ ......................................................................... 74

Tuner (FM/AM) ............................................................. 74

iPod™/iPhone™ ............................................................ 75

Bluetooth™.................................................................... 76

Remote control............................................................... 76

Glossary............................................................................ 77

Audio information.......................................................... 77

Sound field program information................................... 78

Video information .......................................................... 78

Information on HDMI™................................................. 79

About trademarks ........................................................... 79

Specifications.................................................................... 80

Index ................................................................................. 82

En 3

INTRODUCTION

■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier

■ 1-button input/sound field program switching (SCENE function) .......................30

■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations

– (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Speaker impedance configuration.....................................................12

– Speaker channels and functions .................................................................................................................9

– Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................10

– Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................11

– Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................13

– High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .....................................................................13

■ Acoustic parameter adjustment to match your speakers and listening

environment

– Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters

(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer).......................................................................24

– Specifying the settings for each speaker ..................................................................................................50

– Volume control for each speaker..............................................................................................................52

– Speaker distance settings .........................................................................................................................52

– Sound quality control with the equalizer <Graphic Equalizer> ..............................................................52

– Test tone speaker adjustment ...................................................................................................................53

– Bass and treble level adjustment <Tone Control> ...................................................................................29

■ External component connection (max. 14 inputs) and playback

– External component connection...............................................................................................................15

– Audio signal output from the TV transmitted through the HDMI jack ...................................................57

– HDMI/AV video input combining other audio input...............................................................................47

– Correction of lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync>...............................................................54

– Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................4

– Input source name changing <Input Rename> ........................................................................................58

– Configuring the settings specific for each input source <Option menu> ................................................45

– Playback from external components........................................................................................................29

– Playback from an iPod/iPhone (iPod/iPhone and components sold separately) .....................................40

– Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................43

■ HDMI settings

– Setting the HDMI functions.....................................................................................................................55

– Controlling this unit from HDMI compatible device such as TVs <HDMI Control function> ..............68

– Listening to TV audio with single HDMI cable connection <Audio Return Channel function>............70

– Changing HDMI video output up-scaling resolution ..............................................................................57

– Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits ....................................................................................67

■ FM/AM tuner

– FM/AM broadcast listening .....................................................................................................................35

– Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................36

– (U.K. and Europe models) Radio Data System tuning ............................................................................38

– (U.K. and Europe models) Automatic traffic information reception.......................................................39

– Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)...................................................................................................36

– (Asia and General models only) Changing FM/AM frequency steps initializing various settings

for this unit...............................................................................................................................................35

■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback

– Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................30

– Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................31

– Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................31

– Sound field effect configuration ..............................................................................................................60

– Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................30

– Setting the decode format of digital audio signals <Decoder Mode> .....................................................46

– Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method <Extended Surround> .............................................46

■ Front panel information display/OSD (On-Screen Display) on the TV screen

– Front panel display information switching ................................................................................................7

– Front panel display brightness adjustment <Dimmer>............................................................................59

– Adjusting the position of the on-screen display <OSD Shift> ................................................................59

– Digital video/audio signal information display <Signal Info> ................................................................47

■ Volume adjustment functions

– Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................54

– Maximum volume settings.......................................................................................................................55

– Startup volume settings............................................................................................................................55

– Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................46

■ Remote control operation

– External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................63

– Multiple Yamaha receiver operation without signal interference <Remote ID Switching>....................66

■ Other features

– Standby mode after prolonged non-operation <Auto Power Down function>........................................59

– Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>...................................................................8

– To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> .........................42

– Initializing various settings for this unit ..................................................................................................67

– Prohibiting setting changes of this unit <Memory Guard> .....................................................................59

Features and capabilities

En 4

INTRODUCTION

Features and capabilities

About this manual

Supplied accessories

Check that you received all of the following parts.

• Remote control

• Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2

• YPAO microphone

• AM loop antenna

• Indoor FM antenna

• VIDEO AUX input cover

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• This manual is created prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and

product, the product has priority.

• “

dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the

remote control. Refer to the “Part names and functions” (☞

p. 5)

for the information about each position of the parts.

• J

1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the

corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page.

• ☞

indicates the page describing the related information.

• Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the

corresponding page in “Part names and functions.”

Front panel

Rear panel

Front panel display

Remote control

■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied)

To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input

cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks.

To remove the cover, push the left section of it.

Attach the cover

PUSH

Remove the cover

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the

battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote

control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery

compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+

and -).

Replace the batteries with new ones if the following symptoms

become evident:

• The remote control can only be operated within a narrow range.

•

bTRANSMIT does not light up, or only lights dimly.

NOTE

If there are remote control codes for external components

registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more

than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote

control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur,

replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control

codes.

Battery compartment

cover

Battery compartment

En 5

INTRODUCTION

Front panel

a A (Power)

Switches this unit between on and standby mode.

b HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator

Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby

mode.

• When Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from

an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV

during the standby mode (☞

p. 56). J1

• When an iPod is charging in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

during the standby mode (☞

p. 42).

c YPAO MIC jack

Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker

balance automatically (☞

p. 24).

d INFO

Changes the information displayed on the front panel display (☞

p. 7).

e MEMORY

Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞

p. 37). J2

f PRESET j / i

Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞

p. 38). J2

g FM

Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (☞

p. 35). J2

h AM

Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (☞

p. 35). J2

i TUNING jj / ii

Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞

p. 35). J2

j Front panel display

Displays information on this unit (☞

p. 7).

k DIRECT

Switches this unit to direct mode (☞

p. 32).

l PHONES jack

For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback

can also be heard through the headphones.

m INPUT l / h

Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or

right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.

n SCENE

Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single

button (☞

p. 30). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to

switch on.

o TONE CONTROL

Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones

(☞

p. 29).

p PROGRAM l / h

Switches between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are

using and the surround sound decoder (☞

p. 30). Press either the left

or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.

q STRAIGHT

Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (☞

p. 31).

r VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting video cameras, game consoles, and portable music

players to this unit temporarily.

Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this

jack.

s VOLUME

Adjusts the volume level.

Part names and functions

When the HDMI Control functions are “On” (☞p. 56), then

this stays on during standby mode.

VIDEO

AUX

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

VOLUME

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

VIDEO

AUDI O

PORTABLE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

TUNING

YPAO MIC DIRECT

o qm p

nl s

d gf h ke i

1 : During the standby mode, you can select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) to output to a TV. When the input is changed correctly, HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator blinks twice.

2 : Usable when you have selected tuner input.

En 6

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

Rear panel

a DOCK jack

For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-12) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞

p. 40,

☞

p. 43).

b HDMI OUT jack

For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video

signals (☞

p. 16).

c HDMI1-4 jacks

For connecting external components equipped with HDMI-

compatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞

p. 18).

d AV1-6 jacks

For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video

outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞

p. 19, p. 20).

e AV OUT jacks

For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV3-

6 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞

p. 22).

f ANTENNA jacks

For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞

p. 23).

g AUDIO1-2 jacks

For connecting to external components equipped with analog audio

outputs to input sound into this unit (☞

p. 21).

h MONITOR OUT jacks

i AUDIO OUT jacks

For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the

AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞

p. 22).

j SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers

(☞

p. 12).

k SUBWOOFER jack

For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (☞

p. 13).

l VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to

Quick Reference Guide).

m Power cable

For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet.

VIDEO jack For connecting a TV capable of receiving video

input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 16).

COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks

For connecting TV that are compatible with

component video signals, using three cables to

output video signal (☞p. 16).

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL OPTICAL

(

)

AUD

IO 1

AUDIO 2

COAXIAL COAXIAL

(

)

CENTER

SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2HDMI 1 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

FRONT

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO

PRE OUT

OUT

VIDEO

DOCK

ARC

S VIDEO

ANTENNA

75ǡ

GND

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

SPEAKERS

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO

PRE OUT

OUT

ARC

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AV 6

AUD

IO 1

AUD

IO 2

ENTE

URR

UND

URROUND BACK/

AMP

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

ekgij

d h

Distinguishing the input and output jacks

The area around the audio/video output jacks is

marked in white to prevent connection errors. Use

these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or

other external component.

Output jacks

(Ex: U.K. and Europe models)

En 7

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

Front panel display

a HDMI indicator

Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the

HDMI 1-4 inputs are selected.

b CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP

technology is selected.

c Tuner indicator

Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast.

d SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞

p. 8).

e MUTE indicator

Flashes when audio is muted.

f VOLUME indicator

Displays the current volume level.

g Cursor indicators

Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available

for operations.

h Multi information display

Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.

i Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

SL SR

SBL SBRSB

Front speaker L

Surround speaker L

Subwoofer

Front speaker R

Surround speaker R

Center speaker

Surround back

speaker L

Surround back

speaker R

Surround back

speaker J1

■ Changing the front panel display

The front panel can display sound field programs and surround

decoder names as well as the active input source.

Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source →

sound field program → surround decoder in order. J2

SL SR

SBL SBR

Straight

HDMI1

VOL.

Input source name

Sound field program (DSP program)

STEREO

SLEEP

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

MUTE

SBL SBRSB

abcdfe

gh ig

1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.

2 : While selecting a tuner input, the FM/AM frequency is displayed instead of the input source.

En 8

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

Remote control

a Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

b TRANSMIT

Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.

c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power)

Switches an external component on and off.

d Input selector

Select an input source on this unit from which to playback.

e Tuner keys

Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner

input.

f INFO

Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name

of the currently selected input source, the sound field program, the

surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.)(☞

p. 7).

g Sound selection keys

Switch between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are

using and the surround decoder (☞

p. 30).

h SCENE

Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single

button (☞

p. 30). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to

switch on.

i SETUP

Displays a detailed Setup menu for this unit (☞

p. 49).

j Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN

k External component operation keys

Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external

components. J1

l Numeric keys

Enter numbers.

m TV control keys

Operate a monitor such as a TV.

n CODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component operations (☞

p. 63,

p. 67

o RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)

Switches this unit between on and standby mode.

p SLEEP

Switch this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period

of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to set the

time for the sleep timer function.

The SLEEP indicator (☞

p. 7) lights up when the sleep timer is on.

q OPTION

Displays the Option menu for each input source (☞

p. 45).

r VOLUME +/-

Adjusts the volume level (☞

p. 29).

s MUTE

Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞

p. 29).

RECEIVER

SCENE

OPTION

SETUP

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT DIRECT

HDMI

AUDIO

TRANSMIT

SLEEP

1234

1256

V-AU X

TUNER

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

MOVIE MUSIC

STEREO

DVD

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7 856

1234

REC

ENT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK[ A ] [ B ]

HDMI1-4 HDMI1-4 jacks

AV1-6 AV1-6 jacks

AUDIO1-2 AUDIO1-2 jacks

V-AUX Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks

[A]/[B] Changes the external component to operate with

the kExternal component operation keys

without changing inputs. J1

DOCK A Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK

jack.

TUNER FM/AM tuner

FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.

AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.

MEMORY Presets radio stations.

PRESET F / G Selects a preset station.

TUNING H / I Changes tuning frequencies.

Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when

setting menus, etc, are displayed.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen when setting

menus are displayed, or ends the menu display.

Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.

Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off

1 : You can use kExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input

in advance if you want to operate external components (☞

p. 63).

En 9

CONNECTIONS

This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and

connections in your listening environment.

Speaker channels and functions

■

Front left and right speakers

The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo

sound) and effect sounds.

Front speaker layout:

Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening

position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen,

the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the

screen from the bottom.

■

Center speaker

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals,

etc.).

Center speaker layout:

Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When

using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of

the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned.

When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen.

■

Surround left and right speakers

The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1-

channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/

7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and

left rear-area is output.

Surround speaker layout:

Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides

facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60

degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the

speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor.

■

Surround back left and right speakers

Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from

the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output

from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from

surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right

surround speakers.

Surround back speaker setting:

When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers

towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position.

Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same

separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum.

When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the

listening position.

■

Subwoofer

The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency

effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a

subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier.

Subwoofer speaker layout:

Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly

inward to reduce echoes from the wall.

Connecting speakers

Ex.

En 10

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

Speaker layout

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout

(7 speakers + subwoofer)

■ 6.1-channel speaker layout

(6 speakers + subwoofer)

■ 5.1-channel speaker layout

(5 speakers + subwoofer)

• Connect at least two speakers (front left and right).

• If you cannot connect all five speakers, give priority to the

surround speakers.

• The surround speakers should be placed between 60 degrees and

80 degrees from the listening position.

• When used with 7.1-channel speaker layout, arrange the left and

right surround back speakers at least 30 cm a part.

60q

80q

Front speaker L

Front speaker R

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

Surround back

speaker R

Surround back

speaker L

30 cm (12 in)

or more

■ CRT monitors

We recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers to

avoid video distortion, especially for the front and center

speakers near the screen.

If your screen still gets interference from magnetically shielded

speakers, move the speakers farther away from your TV.

60q

80q

Front speaker L

Front speaker R

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

Surround back

speaker

60q

80q

Front speaker L

Front speaker R

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

En 11

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

Connecting speakers and subwoofer

Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.

■ 7.1-channel speaker connection

(7 speakers + subwoofer)

■ 6.1-channel speaker connection

(6 speakers + subwoofer)

■ 5.1-channel speaker connection

(5 speakers + subwoofer)

CAUTION

• Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.

• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+”

(positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-” (negative, black) terminal.

• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP

WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.

CENTER

SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

FRONT

SUBWOOFER

AUDI O

PRE OUT

OUT

SPEAKERS

SubwooferCenter speaker

Front speaker Surround

speaker

Surround back

speaker

RL RL

CENTER

SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

FRONT

SUBWOOFER

AUDI O

PRE OUT

OUT

SPEAKERS

SubwooferCenter speaker

Front speaker Surround

speaker

Surround back

speaker

CENTER

SURROUND

SINGLE

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

FRONT

SUBWOOFER

AUDI O

PRE OUT

OUT

SPEAKERS

SubwooferCenter speaker

Front speaker Surround

speaker

En 12

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

■

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Changing speaker impedance

This unit is configured for 8Ω speakers as the factory setting.

When connecting to 6Ω speakers, carry out the following

procedure to switch to 6Ω.

Switch this unit to the standby mode.

Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on

the front panel.

Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on

the front panel display.

After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are

displayed. J1

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.”

Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then

switch it on again.

The power turns on, when the settings you made has been

configured.

■

Connecting speakers

Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the

ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires

of the cables together firmly so that they will not

cause short circuits.

Loosen the speaker terminals.

Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap

on the side of the terminal.

Tighten the terminal.

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

YPAO MIC

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM l / h

SPIMP.-8MIN

FRONT

Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe,

Asia and Korea models)

Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of

the terminal.

FRONT

Banana plug

1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed

(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞

p. 66) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.

En 13

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

■

Connecting the subwoofer

Connect the subwoofer input jack to the

SUBWOOFER jack on this unit with an audio pin

cable.

Set the subwoofer volume as follows.

Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than

half).

Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.

■

Bi-amp connection for front speakers

This unit can connect speakers that support bi-amp connections.

When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks and the

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram below.

To activate a bi-amp connection, connect the power cable, and then

set the following.

Check that the unit power is in standby mode.

Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on

the front panel.

Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on

the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the

top menu items are displayed. J1

Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to switch to the

following display.

Press STRAIGHT to change the settings to “ON.”

Switch this unit to standby mode, and then switch it

on again.

The bi-amp connection becomes effective and the unit is powered on.

To deactive a bi-amp connection, follow the same procedure and

select “OFF” in step 4.

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer examples

NOTES

• Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any

brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to

the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making

bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or

cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.

• If connecting a bi-amp, then surround back speakers cannot be

used.

FRONT

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

YPAO MIC

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM l / h

BI-AMP-OFF

1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed

(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞

p. 66) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.

En 14

CONNECTIONS

Cable plugs and jacks

This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for

components that you are going to connect.

■

Audio/Video jacks

HDMI jacks

Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.

Only use an HDMI cable.

■

Analog video jacks

■

Audio jacks

Connecting external components

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.

• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

The signal is separated into three components:

luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B), and chrominance red (PR).

Use component video pin cables with three plugs.

HDMI cable

Component video pin cable

S VIDEO jack (U.K. and Europe models

only)

To transmit S-video signals that include luminance

(Y) and chrominance (C) components.

Use S-video cable.

VIDEO jack

This jack transmits conventional analog video

signals.

Use video pin cables.

OPTICAL jacks

These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals.

Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio

signals.

COAXIAL jacks

These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.

Use pin cables for digital audio signals.

AUDIO jacks

These jacks transmit conventional analog audio

signals.

Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to

the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L

jack.

PORTABLE jack

This jack transmits conventional analog audio

signals.

Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting.

S-video cable

Video pin cable

Digital audio fiber-optic cable

Digital audio pin cable

Stereo pin cable

Stereo mini-plug cable

En 15

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

Connecting a TV monitor

This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV.

HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input

signal format supported by your TV.

When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV

Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output

to the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this

unit. J1

When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV

Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external

component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using

for playback.

HDMI

OUT

ARC

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

NEN

VIDE

(BD

DVD)

HDMI

HDM

IDE

DOCK

NTENN

HDMI OUT jack

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

(MONITOR OUT)

VIDEO jack

(MONITOR OUT)

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

S VIDEO

Input Output

HDMI input

Through

Converted

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

S VIDEO

Input Output

Video input

Through

Component

video input

1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio used when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 55).

En 16

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

■

Connecting an HDMI video monitor

Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack.

■

Connecting a component video monitor

Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.

■

Connecting a video monitor

Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.

• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.

HDMI

OUT

ARC

NENT

VIDE

PTI

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

AXIAL

AXIA

)

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

IDE

ANTENNA

NIT

OMPONENT

IDE

HDMI

HDMI input

COMPONENT

VIDEO

NENT

VIDE

PTI

(

)

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

AXIAL

AXIA

(

)

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

IDE

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Component video input

VIDEO

NENT

VIDE

PTI

(

TV)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

AXIAL

AXIA

(

)

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

NENT

VIDE

VIDEO

Video input

1 : When connecting to a TV that supports HDMI input, the video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO jacks is

converted and output from HDMI OUT jack. When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these

jacks.

En 17

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

■ Listening to TV audio

To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV:

When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI

Control function

When your TV supports both HDMI Control (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return

Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the

unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.

The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that

makes TV sound control easier to use.

For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return

Channel function” (☞

p. 70).

When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions

When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI

Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match

operations carried out on the TV.

For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically

when listening to TV audio” (☞

p. 69).

When using other TVs

To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect its AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio

output jacks.

Depending on the connection on TV, connect the TV’s audio output to the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2.

Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.

If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output

to the receiver’s AV4 jack.

Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation

using the SCENE function (☞

p. 30).

You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control

code (☞p. 63).

TV audio output Connection

Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a digital audio pin

cable.

Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a fiber-optic cable.

Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, or V-AUX with a

stereo pin cable.

OPTICAL OPTICAL

(TV)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

UDIO

COAXIAL COAXIAL

(CD)

OMPONENT

IDE

(

DVD

)

HDMI

IDE

ARC

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

IDE

OPTICAL

Audio output

(Optical)

Available input jacks

En 18

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices

This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on

the playback devices such as BD/DVD players.

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with

HDMI

Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-4 jacks.

Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) that the playback device is connected to for

playback.

OPTION

HDMI

1234

ENTER

EIVER

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLA

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

dInput selector

jCursor C / D / E

jENTER

qOPTION

Input jack Video input Audio input

HDMI1 HDMI HDMI

HDMI2 HDMI HDMI

HDMI3 HDMI HDMI

HDMI4 HDMI HDMI

AV1 Component video Optical digital

AV2 Component video Coaxial digital

AV3 Video Coaxial digital

AV4 Video Optical digital

AV5 Video Analog (Stereo)

AV6 Video Analog (Stereo)

AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo)

AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo)

VIDEO AUX Video Analog (Stereo)

NENT

VIDE

OPTICA

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDIO 2

OAXIA

COAXIA

)

FRON

HDMI

OUT

UDIO

IDE

DOC

ANTENNA

NIT

NEN

VIDE

HDMI

HDMI output

BD/DVD player

■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals

from a jack other than HDMI

This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from

other input jacks.

For example, if an playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI

jack, use the following method to change the audio input.

Use the dInput selector to select the desired HDMI input source.

Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1

Press jCursor C repeatedly to select “Audio In,” and then press

jENTER.

Press jCursor D / E to select the audio input source.

When the video input source from this unit is selected on TV, the menu items are

displayed on the TV screen (On-Screen Display).

Once you have completed the setup, press qOPTION to close the

Option menu.

1 : When operating the Option menu, information is displayed both on the TV screen (On-Screen Display)

and on the front panel. Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option

menu)” (☞

p. 45) for details on the Option menu.

OPTICAL

(BD/DVD)

HDMI 1

OMPONEN

IDE

OPTICAL

(TV)

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

OAXIA

(

CD)

HDMI

DMI

OUT

IDE

ANTENNA

NIT

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDE

HDMI

OPTICAL

HDMI

HDMI/Audio (Optical)

output

BD/DVD player

HDMI1OPTION

AudioIn

;;;;;;

AV1

If you have selected AV1 input audio (optical digital)

En 19

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component

cables

Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks.

Using optical digital audio output sources

Select the AV1 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.

Using coaxial digital audio output sources

Select the AV2 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

PTICA

(

)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

COAXIAL

OAXIA

)

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDM

IDE

ANTENNA

NIT

OMPONENT

IDE

COMPONENT

OPTICAL

Component video / Audio (Optical)

output

BD/DVD player

AV 2

COAXIAL

NENT

VIDEO

PTICA

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 1

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OAXIAL

)

(

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDM

OUT

IDE

ANTENNA

NIT

OMPONENT

VIDE

IDE

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COAXIAL

Component video / Audio (Coaxial)

output

BD/DVD player

■ Component connections to analog audio output devices

You can use the video input from the AV1-2 jacks in combination with the audio input from other

AV inputs or AUDIO1-2.

When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input

for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a

jack other than HDMI” (☞

p. 18) for detailed setup guidance.

Select the AV input source (AV1-2) that is connected by component video cable to the playback

device for playback. When the video input source from this unit is selected on TV, the menu items

are displayed on the TV display (On-Screen Display).

COMPONENT

VIDEO

AUDIO 1

PTI

(

)

AUDIO 2

AXIAL

AXIA

)

(

DVD)

HDMI 2HDMI 1

HDMI

VIDE

ANTENNA

NIT

NEN

IDE

AUDIO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Component video / Audio

output

Game console

AV1OPTION

AudioIn

;;;

AUDIO1

If you have selected AUDIO1 input audio (Analog stereo)

En 20

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with S-video

cables (U.K. and Europe models only)

Connect the S-video cable to the AV5 input jack. Connect the output audio to the AV5 analog audio

jack.

Select the AV5 input source for connected video output that the playback device is connected to for

playback. Video from the S VIDEO jack is output through the HDMI OUT jack only.

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables

Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks.

Using optical digital audio output sources

Select the AV4 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.

Using coaxial digital audio output sources

Select the AV3 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.

Using analog stereo audio output sources

Select the AV5 or AV6 input that the playback device is connected to for playback.

AV 5

NEN

IDEO

PTICA

OPTICA

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OAXIA

COAXIAL

)

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-video / Audio output

BD/DVD player

OPTICAL

NEN

IDEO

PTICA

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OAXIA

COAXIAL

)

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

VIDEO

OPTICAL

Video / Audio (Optical)

output

BD/DVD player

COAXIAL

(CD)

VIDEO

NEN

IDEO

PTICA

OPTICA

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OAXIA

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

VIDEO

COAXIAL

Video / Audio (Coaxial)

output

BD/DVD player

NEN

IDEO

PTICA

OPTICA

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OAXIA

COAXIAL

)

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

AUDIO

VIDEO

Video / Audio

output

BD/DVD player

En 21

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

■

Connecting CD players and other audio devices

Using analog stereo output sources

Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) that the playback device is connected to for playback.

Using optical digital output sources

Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) that the playback device is connected to for playback.

Using coaxial digital output sources

Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) that the playback device is connected to for playback.

NEN

IDEO

PTICA

OPTICA

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

OAXIA

COAXIAL

)

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

AUDIO

Audio output

CD player

OPTICAL OPTICAL

NEN

IDEO

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

OAXIA

COAXIAL

)

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

OPTICAL

CD player

Audio (Optical) output

We recommend connecting audio devices with an coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital

jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD”

SCENE key (☞

p. 30).

COAXIAL COAXIAL

(CD)

NEN

IDEO

PTICA

OPTICA

(

)

AV 1

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

DMI

OUT

VIDE

DOCK

ANTENNA

NIT

COMPONENT

VIDE

COAXIAL

Audio (Coaxial) output

CD player

En 22

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

Connecting video cameras and portable audio players

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect video cameras, video game units,

or portable audio devices to the receiver.

Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices.

Transmitting input A/V to external components

This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components

through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to

VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components.

Using the AV OUT jacks

Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks.

Using the AUDIO OUT jacks

Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks.

• Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.

• When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound

output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted.

VIDEO

AU X

STRAIGHT

RADIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

PORTABLE

AU D I O

VIDEO

AUDIO OUT

Audio output

Portable audio player Video cameras

Audio output

Video output

HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, S-video signals and digital audio signals

cannot be transmitted from these jacks.

OUT

AUDI O

OUT

NENT

VIDE

PTI

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

AXIA

AXIAL

(

)

(

DVD

)

HDMI

OUT

IDE

ANTENNA

NIT

OUT

NENT

VIDE

IDE

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

Audio recorder

Audio input

VCR

Video / Audio

input

En 23

CONNECTIONS

An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas

properly to their respective jacks.

Assembling the AM loop antenna

Connecting the FM/AM antennas

ANTENNA

75ǡ

GND

ENT

(BD

DVD)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

OUT

VIDE

OCK

MONITOR OUT

NENT

VIDEO

VIDE

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Position the AM antenna away from the receiver.

The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the

GND jack.

Connecting the AM loop antenna

ReleaseInsertPress and hold

■ Improving FM reception

We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized

dealer.

■ Improving AM reception

Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5-10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop

antenna is still connected.

Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper

plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.

The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.

En 24

CONNECTIONS

This unit is equipped with a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using

YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings for which specialist knowledge is usually needed, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room

in which this unit is placed). J1

Check the following before using YPAO.

This unit

• The headphones are removed.

• This unit is connected to the TV correctly.

• The power is turned on.

• The video input to which the video output from this unit has been

selected.

Subwoofer

• The power is turned on.

• Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if

present) is set to maximum.

Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in

your listening position.

Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.

Switch this unit on.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack

on the front panel.

“MIC ON. View OSD MENU” appears on the front panel display,

and the following appears on the TV screen. J2

Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

When you use YPAO, a test tone will be output from the

speakers for approximately 3 minutes and acoustic measuring

will be performed. When using YPAO, be careful of the

following.

• The test tone is output at high volume. Please refrain from using

this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others nearby.

• Please take care that the test tone does not frighten any small

children.

You can view the operations of YPAO on the front panel display

or on the OSD (On-Screen Display) displayed on your TV while

you use it. This explanation uses references to the OSD display

on your TV.

When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use

equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)

as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod

screws to fix the microphone in place.

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer examples

YPAO microphone

INFO

YPAO MIC

AutoSetup

EQ Type;;;;Natural

[SETUP]:Start

.Start



[OPTION]:EQ Select

Continues to the

1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they

are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.

2 : To cancel measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone.

En 25

CONNECTIONS

Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

If necessary, press qOPTION repeatedly

and select the measuring acoustic

characteristics in the “EQ Type” setting. J1

During YPAO, the results of measuring the acoustic

characteristics are used to set the equalizer (parametric

equalizer) to give a unified sound field. After setting,

you can select the characteristics of the sound field in

“EQ Type,” as necessary.

Press iSETUP to start measurement.

The following display appears when measurement

finishes without any problems.

Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in

the following order:

Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and

Surround Back/Subwoofer

DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening position

in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

LVL

Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level

Press jENTER to apply the results of

measurement.

Remove the YPAO microphone.

YPAO finishes automatically when the YPAO

microphone is removed.

OPTION

SETUP

ENTER

EIVER

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLA

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

iSETUP

jCursor B / D / E

jENTER

qOPTION

Natural

(Default)

Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural

acoustics.

Flat Sets uniform characteristics for each

speaker. Choose this when all of the

speakers used are of the same quality. If

the treble range sounds harsh after

adjustment, select “Natural” and measure

again.

Front Sets the characteristics of each speaker to

match the front speakers. Choose this

when the front speakers are of

significantly higher quality than the other

speakers.

This completes preparations. To achieve more

accurate results, be careful of the following when

measuring.

• Measuring will take approximately 3 minutes. Keep

the room as quiet as possible during measurement.

• Wait in the corner of the listening room during

measurement or leave it entirely, to avoid becoming an

obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO

microphone.

AutoSetup

.

;PreCheck



;Initializing

[]:Exit



;MainCheck



CheckCH=FrontL



;Calculation



;Level

;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;02%

Display during measurement

AutoSetup

RESULT

[ENTER]:Finish

SP:3/4/0.1



.>SetCancel

DIST:2.50/3.00m

LVL:-1.0/+1.5dB

[p]/[[]:Select

NOTE

When a problem occurs, an error message or report

appears either during or after measurement. Use the

following page as a reference to solve the problem,

and carry out YPAO again.

If you want to carry out measurement again, press

jCursor E to select “Cancel” and press

jENTER. After this operation, use the same

procedure to carry out YPAO again.

The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you

have finished measuring, store the microphone out of

direct sunlight, and away from locations that may

experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV

equipment.

AutoSetup

AUTOSETUPFinished

[SETUP]:Exit



PRESS[ENTER]

Disconnect Microphone

1 : You can also select “EQ Type” using the cursor keys. Press

jCursor B to select “EQ Type,” and you can change the setting

using

jCursor D / E.

En 26

CONNECTIONS

Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

■

When an error message appears

during measurement

Check the content of the message from the “Error

message” (☞

p. 27) to resolve the problem, and carry out

the measurement process again.

Check the error code that appears in the display, and

carry out YPAO again by performing the following steps.

When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-4” or “E-6” is

displayed:

Press jCursor C once, and then press

jCursor E to select “Exit.”

Press jENTER to finish YPAO, and switch

the unit to standby mode.

Check that the speakers are properly

connected.

Turn on the unit, and then carry out YPAO

again.

When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is

displayed:

Check that the environment is suitable for

accurate measurement.

Press jCursor C once to select “Retry.”

Press jENTER to carry out YPAO again.

When “E-10” is displayed:

Press jCursor C once to select “Exit.”

Press jENTER to finish YPAO.

Switch the unit to standby mode.

Turn on the unit again, and then carry out

YPAO.

■

When a warning message appears

after measurement

Check the content of the message from the “Warning

message” (☞

p. 28) to resolve the problem. You can

confirm the speaker that has the problem on the TV screen.

Confirm the warning message:

Press jENTER once.

When multiple warning messages exist:

Use jCursor D / E to display other warning messages.

When applying the results of measurement:

If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to

switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Set,” and

press jENTER.

When cancelling YPAO:

If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to

switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel,”

and press jENTER.

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLA

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

jCursor C / D / E

jENTER

ERROR

Don'toperate

.E-9:USER CANCEL

[ENTER]:Return

anyfunction



>RetryExit

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

NOTE

Although you can apply the results of measurement

when a warning message appears, doing so will not

provide optimal sound. We recommend you resolve

the problem and then carry out YPAO again.

AutoSetup

RESULT

.WARNING(1)

[ENTER]:Finish

SP:3/4/0.1



>SetCancel

DIST:2.50/3.00m

LVL:-1.0/+1.5dB

[p]/[[]:Select

Number of messages

WARNING

------

W-3:LEVELERROR

[ENTER]:Return

---



SWFR:TOO LOUD

---SR

SBLSBR

[p]/[[]:Select

Speaker that has a problem

En 27

CONNECTIONS

Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

■

Message list

■ When a warning message appears before

measurement

■ Error message

NOTE

If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have

occurred and carry out the measurement process again.

Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is

not connected.

Connect the YPAO

microphone to the YPAO

MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug HP! The headphones are

connected.

Remove the headphones.

Memory Guard! The settings of this unit

are protected.

Set “Memory Guard” in

the Setup menu to “Off”

(☞p. 59).

E-1:

NO FRONT SP

The unit was not able to

find the front channel.

Check that the left and

right front speakers are

connected correctly.

E-2:

NO SUR. SP

The unit was only able to

find one of side of the

surround channels.

Check that the left and

right surround speakers

are connected correctly.

E-4:

SBR.SBL

Only one surround back

speaker is connected and

only the right side

surround back channel

sound is detected.

When only one surround

back speaker is

connected, connect to the

left side (SINGLE)

terminal.

E-5:

NOISY

The noise is too loud,

preventing accurate

measurements from

being taken.

Measure again in quiet

surroundings. Turn off any

devices in the room that

may be emitting noise, or

place them further away

from the YPAO

microphone.

When this message is

displayed, selecting

“Proceed” will allow you

to continue measuring.

However, we recommend

resolving the problem and

measuring again, as

continuing measurement

without doing so will not

give accurate results.

E-6:

CHECK SUR.

Even though surround

left and right speakers are

not connected, only the

surround back speakers

are connected.

When using surround back

speakers, connection of the

surround left/right

speakers is necessary.

E-7:

NO MIC

The YPAO microphone

has been removed.

While measuring, take

care not to touch the

YPAO microphone.

E-8:

NO SIGNAL

The YPAO microphone

could not distinguish a

test tone.

Check that the YPAO

microphone has been

installed correctly.

Check that each speaker

has been connected and

installed correctly.

The YPAO microphone

or the YPAO MIC jack

may be broken. Inquire at

the retailer where you

purchased this unit, or the

nearest Yamaha service

center.

E-9:

USER CANCEL

You have carried out an

operation that has

cancelled the measuring

process.

Carry out the measuring

process again. Do not

operate this unit by, for

example, adjusting the

volume.

E-10:

INTERNAL ERROR

An internal error has

occurred.

Carry out the measuring

process again. Contact a

Yamaha service center if

“E-10” appears again.

En 28

CONNECTIONS

Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

■ Warning message

W-1:

OUT OF PHASE

The speakers displayed

are connected with the

opposite polarity.

Depending on the type of

speakers you are using

and the environment in

which you have them

installed, this message

may occur even if the

speakers are connected

correctly.

Depending on the type of

speakers, “W-1” may

display even if the

speakers are connected

correctly.

Check that the speaker

polarity + (positive), and

- (negative) are correct. If

these are connected

correctly, you can use the

speakers normally even

this message appears.

W-2:

OVER 24m

(80ft)

The speakers displayed

are separated from the

listening position by

more than 24 m, and

cannot be adjusted

correctly.

Install the speakers with

24 m of the listening

point.

W-3:

LEVEL ERROR

The difference each

channel is too loud or too

low, and cannot be

adjusted correctly.

Check that all speakers

are installed in the same

surroundings.

Check that the speaker

polarity + (positive), and

- (negative) are correct.

We recommend the same

speakers or speakers with

as similar specifications

as possible.

Adjust the volume of the

subwoofer.

If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results,

but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you

resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process

again.

En 29

PLAYBACK

Turn on external components (TV, DVD

player, etc.) connected to this unit.

Turn on this unit and select the input source

using dInput selector.

The name of the selected input source is displayed for

a few seconds. J1

Play the external component that you have

selected as the source input, or select a

radio station on the tuner.

Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the

external component for details on playback.

For details on the following operations, refer to the

corresponding pages:

• “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 35)

• “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™”

(☞

p. 40)

• “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components”

(☞

p. 43)

Press rVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.

To mute the output.

Press sMUTE to mute the audio output.

Press sMUTE again to unmute.

Adjusting high/low-frequency sound

(Tone control)

You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range

(Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds

output from the front left and right speakers to obtain

desired tone.

Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”

The current setting is displayed on the front panel

display.

Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output

level in those frequency ranges.

The display returns to the previous display soon after

you release the key.

Basic playback procedure

dInput selector

rVOLUME +/-

sMUTE

VOLUME

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

1256

V-AUX

TUNER

MUTE

DOCK

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

ENTER

V V

P-

PLA

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be

set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the

headphones connected.

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM l / h

YPAO MIC

SL SR

SBL SBR

SL SR

Treble 0.0dB

TONE

VOL.

Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Adjustment

increments

2.0 dB

If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not

match those from other channels well.

1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front

panel display as necessary (☞

p. 58).

En 30

PLAYBACK

This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound field programs with one key.

Four scenes are available for different uses, such as

playing movies or music. The following input sources

and sound field programs are provided as the initial

factory settings.

Registering input sources/sound

field program

Use dInput selector to select the input

source you want to register.

Use the gSound selection keys to select

the sound field program you want to

Press the hSCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front panel

display.

This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel playback for almost any sound source using various

sound field programs stored on the chip, and a range of sound decoders.

Selecting sound field programs and

sound decoders

This unit offers sound field settings (sound field

programs) in many different categories suitable for

movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound field

program that sounds best with the source you are playing

back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of

the program.

Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)

dInput selector

gSound selection keys

hSCENE

SCENE

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT DIRECT

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

1256

V-AUX

TUNER

MOVIE MUSIC

STEREO

DVD

RADIO

DOCK

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

PRESE

UNIN

ENTER

V V

OP-U

PLAY

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

SCENE Input Sound field program

BD/DVD HDMI1 Straight

TV AV4 Straight

CD AV3 Straight

RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer

When changing “SCENE,” also change the external

component that the remote control operates

(☞p. 63).

SL SR

SET Complete

SCENE1

VOL.

SBL SBR

Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed

Enjoying sound field programs

• Sound field programs are stored for each input source.

When you change the input source, the sound field

program previously selected for that input source is

applied again.

• When you playback DTS Express sources or audio

signals with sampling frequency of higher than

96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞

p. 31) is

automatically selected.

• When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA

DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

Continues to the

En 31

PLAYBACK

Enjoying sound field programs

Selects sound field program:

MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly

MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly

Selects stereo reproduction:

Press gSTEREO repeatedly

Selects compressed music enhancer:

Press gSTEREO repeatedly

Selects surround decoder:

Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly

Switches Straight decoding mode:

Press gSTRAIGHT

Switches Direct mode (☞p. 32):

Press gDIRECT

■

Enjoying unprocessed playback

(Straight decoding mode)

Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback

sound without sound field processing. You can playback

as follows in straight decoding mode.

2-channel sources such as CD

Stereo sound plays through the front left and right

speakers.

Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/

DVD

Plays back audio from a playback source without

applying sound field effects, using an appropriate

decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.

Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight

decoding mode.

■

Enjoying stereo playback

Select “2ch Stereo” from the surround field programs

when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound

(from the front speakers only), regardless of the

playback source.

Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the

playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.

2-channel sources such as CD

Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.

Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD

Playback channels other than the front channels in the

playback source are mixed with the front channels and

played back through the front speakers.

Press gSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch

Stereo.”

Sound selection keys

gMOVIE

gMUSIC

gSTEREO

gSUR. DECODE

gSTRAIGHT

gDIRECT

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT DIRECT

MOVIE MUSIC

STEREO

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

ADI

ENTER

V V

OP-U

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

• You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel

display to check what speakers are currently

outputting sound (☞

p. 7).

• You can adjust sound field elements (sound field

parameters) for each of the programs.

SL SR

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

VOL.

SBL SBR

Sound field program categories

Program

To disable straight decoding mode, press

gSTRAIGHT again.

SL SR

Straight

VOL.

SBL SBR

SL SR

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

VOL.

SBL SBR

Previously selected program

To disable stereo playback, press any of the gSound

selection keys to select a sound field program other

than “2ch Stereo.”

2ch Stereo

STEREO

VOL.

SL SR

Hall in Vienna

MUSIC

VOL.

SBL SBR

En 32

PLAYBACK

Enjoying sound field programs

■

Enjoying sound field programs

without surround sound speakers

This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to

enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You

can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a

minimal configuration of the front speakers only.

This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode

automatically when surround speakers are

unavailable. J1

■

Enjoying sound field programs

with headphones

Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the

reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT

CINEMA mode). J2

■

Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality

(Direct mode)

Use Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of

the selected source. When direct mode is enabled, this

unit plays back the selected source with the least

circuitry. J3

Press gDIRECT to turn direct mode on. J4

gDIRECT

DIRECT

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

ENTER

V V

OP-U

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

To disable direct mode, press gDIRECT again.

VOL.

Direct

1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the

following conditions:

• When headphones are connected to this unit.

• When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected.

• When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.

2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the

following conditions:

• When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected.

• When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.

3 : The following features are disabled in direct mode.

• sound field program, tone control

• display and operation of the Option menu and Setup menu

4 : While direct mode is on, the front panel display screen becomes

dim in order to reduce noise. When turning Direct mode off, the

brightness of the screen returns to the previous setting.

En 33

PLAYBACK

Enjoying sound field programs

Sound field programs

■

Category: MOVIE

Sound field programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games.

■

Category: MUSIC

This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.

in the table indicates the sound field program for CINEMA DSP.

Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the

original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has

been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is

surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It

reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies

with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to

large, impressive sounds.

Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science

fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically

created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure

movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also

restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the

sound.

Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from

serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an

optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically

around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even

after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in

an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion

and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound

depth.

Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety

programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and

sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands

in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.

Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses

reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing

environment that makes the listener feel as if they are right there by enhancing various

effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound

field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth

and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the

movie scenes in the game.

Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using

stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,

beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual

seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is

traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from

all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a

palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber

music.

Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,

live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460

seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.

The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant

sound.

Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz

music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field

that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,

and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

En 34

PLAYBACK

Enjoying sound field programs

■

Category: STEREO

Suitable for listening to stereo sources.

■

Category: ENHNCR (Compressed music enhancer)

Suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3.

■

Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode)

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sound

sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder.

2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel

signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right

speakers.

7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel

sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all

speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at

parties, etc.

Straight Enhancer Use this program to restore the original depth and dynamics of 2-channel or multi-channel

to compression audio.

7ch Enhancer Use this program to playback compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of sound

sources.

q PLIIx Movie /

q PLII Movie

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is

suitable for movies. J1

q PLIIx Music /

q PLII Music

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is

suitable for music. J1

q PLIIx Game /

q PLII Game

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is

suitable for games. J1

Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.

1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:

• When the “Sur. B” setting in “Speaker Setup” of the Setup menu is set to “None.”

• When headphones are connected.

En 35

PLAYBACK

The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following

two modes for tuning.

Normal tuning

You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching

or specifying its frequency.

Preset tuning (☞p. 36)

You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by

registering them to specific numbers, and later just select

those numbers to tune in.

Selecting a frequency for reception

(Normal tuning)

Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.

Press eFM or eAM to select a band to

receive.

FM/AM tuning

dTUNER

eFM

eAM

TUNER

FM AM

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

ENTER

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of

the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the

best reception.

(Asia and General models only)

The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are

9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM.

Carry out the following settings and select the

frequency steps suitable for your listening

environment.

Switch this unit to the standby mode.

Press A while pressing and holding

STRAIGHT on the front panel.

Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is

displayed on the front panel display.

After approximately a few seconds, the top menu

items are displayed. J1

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

YPAO MIC

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM l / h

Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to display

“TU.”

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a

frequency steps.

Switch this unit to the standby mode, and

then switch it on again.

The power turns on, with the settings you made

configured.

FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on

the country or region where the unit is being used.

This explanation uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

TU-AM9/FM50

SL SR

FM87.50MHz

VOL.

SBL SBR

Continues to the

1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as

needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞

p. 66) for details on the

Advanced Setup menu.

En 36

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

Use eTUNING H / I to set a frequency to

receive.

TUNING H

Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for

longer than a second to search automatically for a station

on a higher frequency than the current one. J1

TUNING I

Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for

longer than a second to search automatically for a station

on a lower frequency than the current one. J1

Registering and recalling a

frequency (Preset tuning)

You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations as preset

stations. There are two methods of presetting stations,

“Auto Preset” and “Manual Preset.” Use one of these

methods to register stations.

■

Presetting FM stations

automatically (Auto Preset)

The tuner detects FM stations with strong signals and

registers up to 40 automatically.

Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu. J3

Use jCursor B / C to select “Auto Preset.”

TUNER

eTUNING H / I

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

lNumeric keys

qOPTION

OPTION

TUNER

TUNING

ENTER

7 856

1234

ENT

EIVER

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

■ Entering a frequency number

In normal tuning mode, use the lNumeric keys on

the remote control to enter a frequency. Leave the

decimal point out when entering a number. J2

For example, enter as follows to select a station on

98.50MHz.

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

FM98.50MHz

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

Lights up when receiving

a broadcast from a station

Lights up when receiving

a stereo broadcast

9 8

■ When signal reception is poor

When you are receiving an FM broadcast and cannot

obtain a stable stereo broadcast, you can force this

unit to receive in a monaural mode.

Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner

input.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu. J3

Use jCursor B / C to select “FM Mode.”

Press jENTER and use jCursor D / E to

select “Mono.”

When setting is completed, press

qOPTION to close the Option menu.

To return this unit to its original settings, use the

same procedure and select “Stereo” in step 4.

FMMode

OPTION

VOL.

SBL SBR

FMMode:Mono

9850

VOL.

AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use

manual station preset (☞

p. 37).

SL SR

Auto Preset

OPTION

VOL.

SBL SBR

Continues to the

1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has

started.

2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you

enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that

the frequency entered is correct.

3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input

source (Option menu)” (☞

p. 45) for details on the Option menu.

En 37

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

Press jENTER, then press ePRESET F /

G or jCursor B / C to choose the present

number from which to start the Auto Preset

function.

Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after

you select a preset number.

If you do not select a preset number, Auto Preset will

begin approximately 5 seconds after “READY” is

displayed.

The Option menu closes automatically when presetting

is complete. J1

■

Registering stations manually

(Manual Preset)

Select stations manually and register them as presets

individually.

Tune in to the station you want to register,

referring to “Selecting a frequency for

reception (Normal tuning)” (☞

p. 35).

Use one of the following methods to

receiving.

■ Registering to a preset number to which no

station is registered

Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer.

The station will be registered automatically to the lowest

open preset number (or the next number after the one

registered most recently).

■ Designating a preset number for

registration

Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on

the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset

number that the station has been registered to will

appear.

Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset to register

the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register.

MEMORY

ePRESET F / G

jCursor B / C

jENTER

jRETURN

RETURN

MEMORY

PRESET

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

ETU

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

To cancel registration, press jRETURN.

SL SR

01:FM87.50MHz

READY

VOL.

SBL SBR

Selecting a preset number

Status Frequency

Preset number

SEARCH MEMORY

During Auto Preset

Preset for stations

SL SR

Auto Preset

FINISH

VOL.

SBL SBR

When Auto Preset is complete

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

01:FM98.50MHz

MEMORY

VOL.

SBL SBR

Registered frequencies

To cancel registration, press jRETURN or do not

operate the remote control for about 30 seconds.

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

01:Empty

9850

VOL.

SBL SBR

Preset number

The newly registered frequency

Empty, or the frequency registered

most previously

Blinks

1 : The preset with the lowest preset number will be selected

automatically immediately after presetting.

En 38

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

Recalling a preset station

You can call preset stations registered by automatic

station preset or manual station preset. J1

To select a registered station, press ePRESET

F / G to select the preset number of the

station. J2

Clearing preset stations

Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu. J3

Use jCursor B / C to display “Clear

Preset” and press jENTER.

Use jCursor B / C to select the preset

number you want to clear, and press

jENTER to clear it.

Press qOPTION to finish this operation.

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by

FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive

various Radio Data System data such as “Program

Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time”

when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting

stations.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System

information

You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System

information: “Program Service,” “Program Type,”

“Radio Text,” “Clock Time.”

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

dTUNER

ePRESET F / G

jCursor B / C

jENTER

jRETURN

lNumeric keys

qOPTION

OPTION

RETURN

TUNER

PRESET

ENTER

7 856

1234

ENT

EIVER

ETU

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

Press jRETURN to cancel the operation.

Repeat this operation to clear the registration of

multiple numbers.

SL SR

01:FM98.50MHz

CLEAR

VOL.

SBL SBR

The number of the preset to be cleared

Blinks Registered frequencies

We recommend that you use the automatic preset

tuning to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (☞

p. 36).

Continues to the

1 : Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be

skipped. “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed

when there are no stations are registered.

2 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the

lNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you

want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.”

appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered

the correct number.

3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input

source (Option menu)” (☞

p. 45) for details on the Option menu.

En 39

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

Press fINFO repeatedly until the desired

information is displayed.

Information on the display changes as you press the

key. The kind of information is displayed for a while

and then the information is displayed. J1

Contents of information are as follows.

Front panel display (When “Program Type”

selected)

■

Automatic traffic information

reception (U.K. and Europe models

only)

When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically

search for and receive transmissions from traffic

information broadcast stations. To start this function:

Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu. J2

Use jCursor B / C to select

“TrafficProgram.”

Press jENTER to start the search function.

When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the

display and the Option menu will close.

OPTION

RETURN

TUNER

INFO

ENTER

EIVER

ETU

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

OP-U

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

dTUNER

fINFO

jCursor B / C

jENTER

jRETURN

qOPTION

Type of information Description

Program Service Displays the name of the Radio Data

System program service currently

being received.

Program Type Displays the type of the Radio Data

System program currently being

received.

Radio Text Displays the information on the

Radio Data System program

currently being received.

Clock Time Displays the current time.

DSP Program Displays the currently selected

sound field program.

Audio Decoder Displays the currently selected

surround decoder.

ProgramService ProgramType RadioText

ClockTime

DSPProgramAudioDecoder

(Frequency display)

“Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and

“Clock Type” do not appear when the radio station

does not provide the Radio Data System service.

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

CLASSICS

10800

VOL.

Frequency

Program Type

SL SR

SBL SBR

VolumeTrim

OPTION

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

TrafficProgram

OPTION

VOL.

• The transmission search will begin in approximately

5 seconds. Or, when the status indicator reads

“READY,” you can begin the search immediately by

pressing

jENTER.

• By pressing

jRETURN right before or during a

search, it will return to the Option menu.

• When the status is “READY,” use

jCursor B / C to

start a search in the specified direction.

jCursor B: Searches upward from the current

frequency.

jCursor C: Searches downward from the current

frequency.

If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not

Found” will appear on the display, and the Option

menu will shortly close.

SL SR

SBL SBR

TrafficProgram

READY

VOL.

Status

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

TPFM101.30MHz

FINISH

VOL.

SBL SBR

Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency)

1 : “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when Program

Type, Radio Text, or Clock Time is displayed. That shows this

unit is receiving data (or stopping receiving data). If the data is

receivable, the corresponding information is displayed after a

while.

2 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input

source (Option menu)” (☞

p. 45) for details on the Option menu.

En 40

PLAYBACK

Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote

control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound field programs (☞

p. 34) to give

compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound.

Connecting the Yamaha iPod

universal dock

Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the

DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the

operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for

information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone.

Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the

dock. The unit is now ready for playback.

Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™

After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press

dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/

iPhone.

The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two

ways.

Simple play mode:

Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing

the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen.

Menu browse mode:

Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed

on the TV.

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS are supported (As of March 2010).

• When connecting an iPhone, please use a YDS-12.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12.

dDOCK

DOCK

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

ENTER

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

CAUTION

To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode

before connecting an iPod universal dock.

SL SR

SBL SBR

iPodconnected

DOCK

VOL.

DOCK

NEN

VIDE

PTI

AXIA

AXIAL

(

)

IDE

Yamaha iPod universal dock

En 41

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

■

Playing only iPod/iPhone audio

through the unit

(Simple play mode)

Use the following remote control keys to operate

(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone. You can

check song information on the iPod/iPhone screen. J1

■

Playing iPod/iPhone viewing the

menu displayed on the TV

(Menu browse mode)

Operate the iPod/iPhone using the unit’s remote control,

while looking at the menu displayed on the TV.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Press kDISPLAY to switch to menu browse

mode.

Press jCursor B / C to select the content

(music or video) that you want to play, and

press jCursor E. J2

Select iPod/iPhone menu items using

jCursor B / C / D / E, and press jENTER

to play.

The following screen appears on the display during

playback.

a Track number/total tracks

b Artist name

c Album title

d Song title

e Progress bar

f Elapsed time

g Shuffle and repeat icons

h iPod/iPhone status (playback, pausing, search

forward, search backward)

i Remaining time

INFO

ENTER

DISPLAY

DOCK

EIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

dDOCK

fINFO

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

kDISPLAY

k b

dDOCK Switch to the DOCK (iPod) input.

jCursor B / C

Move the cursor up and down to different

fields.

jCursor D / E

Return to the previous menu or enter the

menu you have selected.

jENTER Enter the selected menu.

kDISPLAY

Switches between simple play mode or

menu browse mode.

k w Searches backwards while held down.

k f Searches forwards while held down.

k b

Skip to the beginning of the currently

playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips

one song backwards with each press.

k a Skip to the beginning of the next song.

k s Stops playback.

k e Switches between playback and pause.

k p Switches between playback and pause.

• Information on the iPod/iPhone can only be displayed

in alphanumeric characters. “_” (underscore) is

displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.

• When displaying play information in menu browse

mode, song information (Artist, Album, Song) is

displayed on the front panel. Change the displayed

information by pressing

fINFO repeatedly.

• (Except iPod touch and iPhone) In menu browse

mode, the “Yamaha Mark” will be displayed on the

iPod/iPhone screen. You cannot directly control your

iPod/iPhone while this mark is displayed.

Press kDISPLAY again to return to simple play

mode.

iPod[Play][

FrankieZipper

1/9



0:51-7:44

Made-to-order



RoadtoIndia

|||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

All

1 : Controls on the iPod/iPhone can also be operated in simple

playback mode.

2 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod

universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing

video files.

En 42

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

■

Shuffle/Repeat playback

You can use special playback functions such as shuffle

playback and repeat playback by first displaying the

Option menu.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Press kDISPLAY to switch to menu browse

mode.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu. J1

Press jCursor B / C to select the desired

playback function, “Shuffle” or “Repeat,”

then press jENTER.

Shuffle

Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the

shuffle function is enabled, “ ” appears on the TV

screen.

Repeat

Plays songs or albums repeatedly.

When the repeat function is enabled, “ (One)” or

“ (All)” appears on the TV screen.

Press jCursor D / E to select the desired

playback function.

To close the Option menu, press qOPTION.

Play the iPod/iPhone.

Playback of the iPod/iPhone starts using the function

selected in step 5.

dDOCK

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

kDISPLAY

qOPTION

OPTION

ENTER

DISPLAY

DOCK

EIVER

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

Off Does not play back songs or albums in

random order.

Songs Plays “Songs” back in random order.

Albums Plays “Albums” back in random order.

Off Does not play back songs or albums

repeatedly.

One Plays a “Song” back repeatedly.

All When all “Songs” have completed

playback, returns to the start and repeats

playback.

To disable Shuffle/Repeat playback, redo the above

steps, and return settings to “Off.”

■ To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit

is in standby mode

If you connect an iPod/iPhone to the iPod universal

dock the iPod/iPhone will always charge when this

unit is turned on.

This unit can charge an iPod/iPhone even when in

standby mode (iPod Standby Charge function).

Check the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator on

the front panel of this unit to check whether this unit

is charging an iPod/iPhone during in standby mode.

While charging an iPod/iPhone, the HDMI Through/

iPod Charge indicator lights. When Standby Through

function is off, the indicator goes out after the

charging is complete.

If necessary, you can also disable the iPod Standby

Charge function.

All

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK

input.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu.

Use jCursor B / C to display “Standby

Charge” and press jENTER.

Use jCursor D / E to switch the setting

to “Off.”

When setting is completed, press

qOPTION to close the Option menu.

To enable the Standby Charge function again, carry

out this procedure again and change the “Standby

Charge” setting back to “Auto.”

DOCKOPTION

StandbyCharge

AutoOff

1 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input

source (Option menu)” (☞

p. 45) for details on the Option menu.

En 43

PLAYBACK

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible

portable music players. J1

Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver

Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the

DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.

The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be

complete when this unit is turned on.

Pairing Bluetooth™ components

Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth

component for the first time, or when settings have been

deleted.

Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth

component as necessary when carrying out pairing.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with and set it to pairing mode.

Press qOPTION to display the Option menu

and use jCursor B / C to select “Pairing.”

Press jENTER to start pairing.

Make sure the Bluetooth component

recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver.

When the device is recognized, it will appear in the

Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10

YAMAHA.”

Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

from the Bluetooth component list, and

enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth

component. J2

Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components

NOTE

When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection

you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.

dDOCK

eMEMORY

jCursor B / C

jENTER

jRETURN

qOPTION

OPTION

RETURN

MEMORY

ENTER

DOCK

EIVER

ETU

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

CAUTION

To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode

before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

DOCK

NEN

VIDE

PTI

AXIA

AXIAL

(

)

IDE

Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver

The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be

paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When

the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the

device which has not been used for the longest period

of time will be deleted.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Pairing

OPTION

VOL.

• To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.

• You can also press and hold

eMEMORY on the front

panel to begin pairing.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Searching...

DOCK

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Completed

DOCK

VOL.

When pairing occurs correctly

1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)

of the Bluetooth profile.

2 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is

carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is

displayed instead of “Completed.”

En 44

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components

Using Bluetooth™ components

When pairing is complete, carry out the following

procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this

unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless

connection is complete, you playback from Bluetooth

components.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Press qOPTION to display the Option

menu.

Use jCursor B / C to select “Connect” and

press jENTER. J1

Operate the Bluetooth component for

playback.

DOCK

jCursor B / C

jENTER

qOPTION

OPTION

ENTER

DOCK

EIVER

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless

connection is established automatically or by

operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is

not necessary to carry out the following procedure.

“Not found” is displayed when there is an error

connecting. Check that the following conditions have

been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless

connection again.

• Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.

• The Bluetooth component is switched on.

• The Bluetooth component is within 10 meters/32 feet

of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same

steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.”

SL SR

SBL SBR

BTconnected

DOCK

VOL.

When wireless connection is complete

1 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been

connected.

En 45

SETUP

This receiver has a unique option menu specific for each type of input source, such as volume trim for compatible input sources, audio/video data display for signals from

playback devices, and other frequently used menu items.

Option menu display and setup

You can view the operations of Option menu on the front

panel display or on the OSD (On-Screen Display)

displayed on your TV while you use it. This explanation

uses references to the OSD display on your TV.

Use the dInput selector on the remote

control to select the Option menu you want

to display.

Press qOPTION.

The Option menu appears for the desired input source.

Select the desired control/setup item using

jCursor B / C and press jENTER.

The displayed Option menu items differ depending on

the input source.

For details, read the following Option menu items

section.

Select the desired menu item (or enable a

function) using jCursor B / C / D / E and

jENTER.

Parameters of the selected item are displayed. The

parameters you can set differ depending on the menu

items.

To close the Option menu, press qOPTION.

Option menu items

The following menu items are provided for each input

source.

Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)

dInput selector

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

jRETURN

qOPTION

OPTION

RETURN

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

1256

V-AUX

TUNER

ENTER

DOCK

EIVER

ETU

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

[

]

[

]

HDMI1OPTION

DecoderMode

.VolumeTrim

[ENTER]:Select

ExtendedSurround



AudioIn

SignalInfo

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

Option menu

• You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous

screen or close the Option menu.

• Certain selected menu items may automatically close

the Option menu when their functions are carried out.

For a few seconds after closing the Option menu, the

remote control keys may not function. If this occurs,

reselect the input source.

HDMI1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended

Surround

Audio In Signal Info

AV1-2 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended

Surround

Audio In Signal Info

AV3-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended

Surround

Signal Info

AV5-6 Volume Trim

AUDIO1-2 Volume Trim

V-AUX Volume Trim

TUNER Volume Trim FM Mode Auto

Preset

Clear Preset TrafficProgram J1

iPod

(DOCK)

Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat

Standby Charge

Bluetooth

(DOCK)

Volume Trim Connect/

Disconnect

Pairing

1 : U.K. and Europe models only.

En 46

SETUP

Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)

■

Adjusting volume between input sources

Input source: All

Reduces any change in volume when switching between input

sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You

can adjust this parameter for each input source.

■

Setting the format of digital audio signals

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1

Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if

the format is not automatically detected correctly even during

playback of DTS format audio, this menu item can be used to set

the playback format to DTS.

■

Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback

method

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1

Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or

7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used.

Volume Trim

Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Default setting 0.0 dB

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB steps

Decoder Mode

Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match

the format of the input audio.

DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not

reproduced.

Extended Surround

Auto (Default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a

flag for reproducing surround back channel is present,

and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

q PLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not

surround back channel signals are contained. You can

select this parameter when two surround back

speakers are connected.

q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel

using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether

or not surround back channel signals are contained.

You can select this parameter when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for

input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing

surround back channel is present, and always

reproduces signals in 6.1-channel.

Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not

the flag for reproducing surround back channel is

present.

1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel”

function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TV Audio In).

En 47

SETUP

Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)

■

Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source

video and audio

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-2

Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/

digital audio inputs in situations such as:

– an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot

transmit audio through HDMI

– an playback device with component video output and analog

audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the

system

To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2)

as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this

menu.

Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input

jacks.

■

Displaying information on audio/video

signals

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1

Displays information on digital audio and video signals on the TV

screen.

Audio information

Video information

Audio In

Audio inputs Settings method

Optical digital audio

input

Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component

audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected

input.

Coaxial digital audio

input

Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component

audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected

input.

Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2.

Connect the external component audio cable to the

audio jack for the selected input.

HDMI1OPTION

AudioIn

;;;;;;

AV1

Assignable audio input jacks

Inputs that change the audio source

• For details of settings, refer to “Receiving video signals from the

HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI”

(☞

p. 18) and “Component connections to analog audio output

devices” (☞

p. 19).

• To return audio inputs to their previous settings, display this item

again, and select the original input jack.

Signal Info

HDMI1OPTION

Channel3/2/0.1

AUDIO

FormatDolbyD

Sampling48kHz



InHDMI1080p

OutHDMI1080p

Bitrate384kbps

VIDEO

Menu item

Information

Format Format of audio signals.

Channel The number of input signal channels (front/surround/

LFE).

For example, if input signal channels are 3 front

channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is

displayed.

If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a

total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be

displayed.

Sampling The sampling frequency of analog-to-digital

conversion.

Bitrate The bit rate of input signal per second.

In Format and resolution of video input signal.

Out Format and resolution of video output signal.

Message

(appears only

when an error

has occurred)

Error messages about HDMI signals and components.

Error message

HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed.

Device Over The number of connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Out of Res. The connected monitor is not

compatible with the video input

signal.

• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are being received, and

“---” is displayed if this unit cannot recognize the incoming

signal.

• The bit rate may vary during playback.

1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel”

function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TV Audio In).

En 48

SETUP

Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)

■

Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)

Input source: TUNER

Sets this unit to automatically match FM broadcast frequencies in

stereo, or to convert the frequency to monaural (☞

p. 36).

■

Automatically presetting FM radio

stations

Input source: TUNER

Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency and

registers them as preset stations (☞

p. 36).

■

Clearing preset FM stations

Input source: TUNER

Clears the preset stations (☞p. 38).

■

Searching for traffic information (U.K. and

Europe models only)

Input source: TUNER

Automatically searches for traffic information with the Radio Data

System (☞

p. 39).

■

Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby

mode

Input source: DOCK (iPod)

Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock while

the receiver is in standby mode (☞

p. 42).

■

Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone

Input source: DOCK (iPod)

Changes the shuffle playback style on iPod (☞p. 42).

■

Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone

Input source: DOCK (iPod)

Changes the repeat playback style on iPod (☞p. 42).

■

Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth

component

Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth)

Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off

(☞

p. 44).

■

Pairing Bluetooth component

Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth)

Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 43).

FM Mode

Auto Preset

Clear Preset

TrafficProgram

Standby Charge

Shuffle

Repeat

Connect

Disconnect

Pairing

En 49

SETUP

You can configure various function settings of this unit using the Setup menu.

Setup menu display and settings

You can view the operations of Setup menu on the front

panel display or on the OSD (On-Screen Display)

displayed on your TV while you use it. This explanation

uses references to the OSD display on your TV.

Press iSETUP on the remote control.

Setup menu categories

Use the jCursor B / C to select the desired

menu and press jENTER.

Ex: Sound Setup menu

Use jCursor B / C to navigate the

submenus to find the desired setting and

press jENTER.

When multiple menu item is displayed, use

jCursor B / C to select the desired item.

Use jCursor D / E to change the setting.

You can return to the previous screen by pressing

jRETURN. You can change other items by repeating

step 4 and 5.

Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu.

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

iSETUP

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

jRETURN

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

Speaker Setup Set parameters for speakers, such as

speaker status, and volume adjustment for

each speaker.

Sound Setup Set functions related to audio output, such

as adjustment of maximum volume and

of dynamic range.

HDMI Setup Set functions related to HDMI, such as

HDMI Control functions and video

conversion settings (resolution and aspect

ratio).

Function Setup Sets functions such as changing input

names and auto power down that make

the unit easier to use.

DSP Parameter Edit sound field programs.

Memory Guard Protects settings against accidental

alteration.

SetupMenu



;

SoundSetup

.

;

SpeakerSetup

[ENTER]:Enter



;

HDMI Setup





;

MemoryGuard



;

FunctionSetup



;

DSPParameter

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

;

SoundSetup



;

AdaptiveDRC

.

;

Lipsync

[ENTER]:Enter



;

DynamicRange





;

MaxVolume



;

Init.Volume

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

;

Init.Volume

Init.Volume

;;;;;

Off

[RETURN]:Return



[p]/[[]:Select

For a few seconds after closing the Setup menu, the

remote control keys may not function. If this occurs,

reselect the input source.

En 50

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Setup menu items

Setup menu

Manages settings for speakers

Speaker Setup submenu

■

Manual speaker setup

Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on

manually set parameters. Some items in the “Config” submenu

take up a full screen. To display other items press jCursor B /

Subwoofer

Confirms the subwoofer.

Config

Level

Distance

Equalizer

Test Tone

Speaker Setup

Sound Setup

HDMI Setup

Function Setup

DSP Parameter

Memory Guard

Subwoofer

Front SP

Center SP

Sur. L/R SP

Sur.B L/R SP

Crossover Freq.

Subwoofer Phase

Extra Bass

HDMI Auto

Auto Delay

Manual Delay

Lipsync

Adaptive DRC

Dynamic.Range

Max Volume

Init.Volume

Control

TV Audio In

AudioReturnChan

Standby Through

Audio Output

Resolution

Aspect

Input Rename

AutoPowerDown

Dimmer

OSD Shift

(speakers)

(unit and speakers)

(speakers and frequency bands)

Config Manually manages speaker configuration, such as

speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass

audio processing.

Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on

distance to the listening point.

Equalizer Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output

characteristics.

Test Tone Generates test tones.

;

SpeakerSetup



;

Level

.

;

Config

[ENTER]:Enter



;

Distance





;

Equalizer



;

TestTone

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

Config

In the Config submenu, you can select the speaker size

characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound

reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers.

When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components

of the speakers that you configured are produced from the

subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).

Yes (Default) Select this when you have a subwoofer connected.

During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio

from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass

audio from other channels. J3

None Select this when you do not have a subwoofer

connected. The front speakers will produce audio

from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass

frequency audio from other channels.

Woofer diameter

• 16 cm or larger → Large

• 16 cm or smaller → Small

1 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting.

2 : This menu item appears depending on the “Resolution” setting.

3 : Enabling the “Extra Bass” setting allows both the subwoofer and the front

speakers to produce bass audio.

En 51

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Front SP

Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front

speakers. J1

Center SP

Selects the size of the center speakers.

Sur. L/R SP

Selects the size of the surround speakers.

Sur.B L/R SP

Selects the size of the surround back speakers.

Crossover Freq.

Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component output from

speakers set to “Small.”

Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the

subwoofer or the front speakers. J3

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or

unclear.

Extra Bass

Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be

produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer

and the front speakers.

Small (Default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will

produce front channel low-frequency

components. J2

Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will

produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front

speakers will produce center channel audio.

Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected.

Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected.

None Select this when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel

audio signals.

Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small.

Large Select this when the surround speakers are large.

• When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround

back speaker even if that speaker is connected.

• When set to “None,” the sound field programs will change to

Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

None Select this when no surround back speakers are

connected.

SMLx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is

connected.

SMLx2 (Default) Select when two small surround back speakers are

connected.

LRGx1 Select when one large surround back speaker is

connected.

LRGx2 Select when two large surround back speakers are

connected.

• When there are no surround speakers are inactive, the setting will

automatically change to “None.”

• You can set surround back audio signals, including from the

playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single

speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right

surround back speakers (5.1-channel layout).

40Hz 110Hz

60Hz 120Hz

80Hz (Default) 160Hz

90Hz 200Hz

100Hz

Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase.

Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.

On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the

front channel low-frequency components.

Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the

front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front

channel low-frequency components.

When the “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” the “Extra Bass”

setting is disabled.

1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front

speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will

automatically change to “Large.”

2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from

the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Crossover Freq.” setting.

3 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set

the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less).

En 52

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Controlling the volume of each speaker

Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use jCursor B / C

to select the desired speaker and adjust the volume with jCursor

D / E.

■

Manually setting speaker distance

Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that

sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same

time.

Selecting adjustment units

Use jCursor B / C to select “Unit,” and then use jCursor D / E

to choose the units of length (meters or feet).

Setting distances for each speaker

Use jCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to configure,

and then use jCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker

to your listening position.

■

Adjusting sound quality with the equalizer

Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric or graphic

equalizer.

EQ Type Select

Select an equalizer type.

Level

FR.L Front speaker L

FR.R Front speaker R

CNTR Center speaker

SUR.L Surround speaker L

SUR.R Surround speaker R

SBL Surround back L

SBR Surround back R

SB J1 Surround back

SWFR Subwoofer

Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Default setting 0 dB (FR.L/FR.R/SWFR)

-1.0 dB (CNTR/SL/SR/SBL/SBR/SB)

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

Distance

Unit Selects the distance unit (meters or feet).

Front L Front speaker L

Front R Front speaker R

Center Center speaker

Sur. L Surround speaker L

Sur. R Surround speaker R

Sur. B L Surround back speaker L

Sur. B R Surround back speaker R

Sur. B J1 Surround back speaker

SWFR Subwoofer

Adjustable range 0.30 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)

Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) (Front L/Front R/SWFR)

2.60 m (8.5 ft) (Center)

2.40 m (8.0 ft) (Sur. L/Sur. R/Sur.B L/Sur.B R/Sur.B)

Adjustment

increments

0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Equalizer

Auto PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer to adjust sound quality.

Selecting this setting applies the tone settings

obtained using YPAO (☞p. 24). J2

The acoustic characteristics (EQ Type) selected when

YPAO has been carried out is displayed under Auto

PEQ.

GEQ (Default) Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality. By

pressing jENTER, you can adjust the

characteristics of the graphic equalizer.

Off Disables the equalizer.

1 : “SB” and “Sur.B” is displayed when using a 6.1 channel configuration only.

2 : Using YPAO to carry out acoustic measurement selects “Auto PEQ”

automatically. “Auto PEQ” does not appear if the measurement process has not

been carried out at least once.

En 53

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Generating test tones

Turns the test tone generator on or off.

■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer

When “EQ Type Select” is displayed, use

jCursor D / E to select “GEQ” and press

jENTER.

Check that “Channel” selects and use jCursor D

/ E to select the speaker for which you want to

adjust the equalizer.

;

Equalizer

.Channel;;;;FrontL

63Hz

;;;;;;

0dB

160Hz

;;;;;;

0dB

400Hz

;;;;;;

0dB

1kHz

;;;;;;

0dB

2.5kHz

;;;;;;

0dB

6.3kHz

;;;;;;

0dB

16kHz

;;;;;;

0dB

[p]/[[]:Select

Frequency band Setting the volume level for

the selected frequency

Speaker

Press jCursor C repeatedly to select the

frequency you want to adjust, then use jCursor D

/ E to adjust the volume.

Raising volume: Press jCursor E.

Lowering volume: Press

jCursor D.

When you have finished making adjustments,

press iSETUP to close the Setup menu.

Frequency

range

63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/

16 kHz

Adjustable

range

-6.0 dB to 0 dB to +6.0 dB

Default setting 0 dB

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

You can use jCursor B / C to select another frequency or

return to step 2. Repeat steps 2-3 to adjust the tone to your

liking.

Test Tone

Off (Default) Does not generate test tones.

On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test

tones are produced constantly.

You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For

example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each

speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal

graphic equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while

operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished

making adjustments.

En 54

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Setting the audio output function of this

unit

Sound Setup submenu

■

Synchronizing audio/video output

Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync

function).

HDMI Auto

When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output

timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function.

Auto Delay

Fine-adjust the audio output timing by entering the correction time

provided when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.”

Manual Delay

Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the monitor

does not support the automatic lipsync function or “HDMI Auto” is

set to “Off.”

■

Auto-adjusting the sound level to make

even low volumes more audible

Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level

(from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at

low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “Auto.” J1

When the “Auto” is selected, it adjusts the dynamic range as

follows.

Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Adaptive DRC Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low

volumes more audible.

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for

Dolby Digital and DTS playback.

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.

Init.Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned

on.

;

SoundSetup



;

AdaptiveDRC

.

;

Lipsync

[ENTER]:Enter



;

DynamicRange





;

MaxVolume



;

Init.Volume

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

Lipsync

Off (Default) Select this when the connected monitor does not

support the automatic lipsync function or you do not

want to use the automatic lipsync function. Set the

correction time in “Manual Delay.”

On Select this when the monitor supports the automatic

lipsync function. Fine-adjust the correction time in

“Auto Delay.”

Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms

Adjustment

increments

1 ms

Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms

Adjustment

increments

1 ms

Default setting 0 ms

Adaptive DRC

Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Auto

Off

Auto

Off

Input Level Input Level

Volume: low Volume: high

Output Level

1 : The Adaptive DRC setting is also effective when you use headphones.

En 55

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS

dynamic range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream

(Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback.

■

Setting the maximum volume

Sets a maximum volume level so that the audio is not played too

loudly. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest

volume.

■

Setting the startup volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When

this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the

receiver last entered standby mode. J1

Setting HDMI functions

HDMI Setup submenu

Dynamic Range

Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume

or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream

signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.

(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD

signals based on input signal information.

STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for

regular home use.

Max (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Max Volume

Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB / +16.5 dB (Maximum volume)

Default setting +16.5 dB

Adjustment

increments

5.0 dB

Init.Volume

Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Default setting Off

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off.

TV Audio In J2 Chooses automatically selected audio input in

conjunction with TV operation when the

HDMI Control is turned on.

AudioReturnChan J2 Transmits audio/video output to the TV and

audio input from the TV through a single

HDMI cable.

Standby Through J2 Selects whether HDMI audio/video signals will

be continue to be produced when this unit is on

standby.

Audio Output J2 Selects the audio output device connected to

this unit via HDMI jacks.

Resolution Sets the resolution of video signals converted

from analog to HDMI.

Aspect J3 Sets the horizontal-to-vertical ratio (aspect

ratio) of video signals converted from analog to

HDMI.

;HDMI Setup

TV Audio In

;;;;;AV4

.Control

;;;;;;;;;

[p]/[[]:Select

AudioReturnChan

;

Off



Resolution

;;;*Thrgh

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

1 : When you set the “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Init.Volume,” the “Max

Volume” setting has priority.

2 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting.

3 : This menu item appears depending on the “Resolution” setting.

En 56

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control)

Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices

connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components

support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use

the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s

functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those

devices.

Please refer to “Switching the input source on this unit

automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞

p. 69) for

instructions.

■

Selecting an input source to assign audio

input for the TV

Select the input source that matches operations carried out on the

TV while the HDMI Control function is on.

When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and

the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to

the input source selected here. J2

■

Listening to TV audio via single HDMI

cable (Audio Return Channel)

You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function.

When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and

the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this

unit via an HDMI cable.

The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source

selected in “TV Audio In.” J2

By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s

audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the

unit.

When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return

Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.

■

Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV

during standby mode (Standby Through)

This function allows audio/video signals to continue to be

transmitted to a TV connected to HDMI jacks 1-4 even when this

unit is in standby mode.

Control

Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.”

On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1

If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the

HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate.

TV Audio In

AV1 to AV6 Assigns any of the AV1-6 input source for the audio

input from the TV.

AUDIO1/AUDIO2 Assigns AUDIO1 or AUDIO2 input source for the

audio input from the TV.

Default setting AV 4

• “TV Audio In” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function

(Control) is set to “On.”

• Please refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞

p. 68) for

setting instructions.

• For details on inputting the audio signal from the TV, refer to

“Listening to TV audio” (☞

p. 17).

AudioReturnChan

Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.”

On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.”

• “AudioReturnChan” is only displayed with the HDMI Control

function (Control) is set to “On.”

• Please refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio

Return Channel function” (☞

p. 70) for setting instructions.

SL SR

SBL SBR

AV4

VOL.

Standby Through

Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.”

On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected

HDMI input source to the TV.

• When HDMI Control is “On,” Standby Through function is

automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed.

• When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals

will continue to be transmitted to the TV from the selected HDMI

input source when this unit is in standby mode. You can change

the HDMI input source to transmit signals during the standby

through mode by using

dHDMI1-4 on the remote control. When

the input source is changed, the HDMI Through/iPod Charge

indicator on the front panel blinks twice.

• When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/

iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby

mode. When this indicator is lit, this unit consumes 1 to 3 W of

power.

1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is

automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and

video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be

transmitted to the TV.

2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input

source cannot be used.

En 57

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Changing the output destination of HDMI

input audio signals

Choose whether to playback audio from an external component

such as a BD/DVD player connected via HDMI through this unit or

through a TV.

■

Setting resolution of analog video signals

converted to HDMI

Sets the resolution during up-scaling (when analog video input is

converted to HDMI video).

■

Setting the aspect ratio

Sets the horizontal-to-vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of analog video

converted to HDMI video signals.

Audio Output

Amp (Default) Outputs audio through this unit only. When this

setting is selected, the external component outputs an

audio format compatible with this unit.

TV Outputs audio through a TV only. When this setting is

selected, the external component outputs an audio

format compatible with the TV. J1

Amp+TV Outputs audio from the TV and this unit. When this

setting is selected, the external component outputs an

audio format compatible with this unit and TV.

“Audio Output” is only displayed with the HDMI Control

function (Control) is set to “Off.”

Resolution

Thrgh (Default) No up-scaling.

480p Upscales to 480p (progressive).

720p Upscales to 720p (progressive).

1080i Upscales to 1080i (interlace).

1080p Upscales to 1080p (progressive).

• Video resolution of 480p or less from certain old game console

cannot be converted to HDMI video. Connect the game unit to

video input on this unit, and connect VIDEO (MONITOR OUT)

jack to TV.

• Resolution of HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog

video signals cannot be upscaled.

• When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit

automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. An

asterisk (*) appears to the left of the detected resolution.

• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set

“MON.CHK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP” (☞

p. 67)

and try again.

Aspect

Thrgh (Default) Sets the horizontal-to-vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of

analog video converted to HDMI video signals.

16:9 Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV

with black bands on either side of the screen.

• “Aspect” is not displayed when “Resolution” is set to “Thrgh.”

• The setting is automatically changed to “Off” for video input with

aspect ratios other than 4:3.

• Changing the aspect ratio for HDMI video input or analog video

signals of 720p, 1080i, or 1080p has no effect.

1 : When “TV” is selected, the speakers of this unit do not output sound.

En 58

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Making the receiver easier to use

Function Setup submenu

■

Changing input source names

Changes the input source names to be displayed on the

front panel display.

You can change an input source name by choosing from

a list of templates, or make one of your own.

SETUP

RETURN

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

OP-U

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

iSETUP

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

jRETURN

Input Rename Changes the input source names.

AutoPowerDown Goes enter standby mode if you leave it

without operating.

Dimmer Sets the brightness of the front panel

display.

OSD Shift Adjusts the top and bottom positions of

menus displayed on the screen (On-

Screen Display).

Input Rename

■ Selecting a template

Select “Input Rename” from the Setup

menu and press jENTER.

;

FunctionSetup



;

AutoPowerDown

.

;

InputRename

[ENTER]:Enter



;

Dimmer





;

OSDShift

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

;

InputRename1/3

.HDMI1.

pHDMI1[

HDMI2.(HDMI2)

HDMI3.(HDMI3)

HDMI4.(HDMI4)

AV1.(AV1)

AV2.(AV2)

[]/[]:Up/Down

[p]/[[]:Template

[ENTER]:Edit

Renaming input source

Current

name

Select the input source that you want to

rename using jCursor B / C.

Use jCursor D / E to select a new name

from the following templates.

Confirm the new display name by

pressing jRETURN. Press iSETUP to

exit the Setup menu.

To cancel a name change, select the original name

and then press

jRETURN to exit renaming.

■ Entering an original name

Select “Input Rename” from the Setup

menu and press jENTER.

Blu-ray Satellite

DVD VCR

SetTopBox Tape

Game MD

TV PC

DVR iPod

CD HD DVD

CD-R (blank)

;

InputRename1/3

.HDMI1.

HDMI1

[

HDMI2.

(

HDMI2

)

HDMI3.

(

HDMI3

)

HDMI4.

(

HDMI4

)

AV1.

(

AV1

)

AV2.

(

AV2

)

[]/[]:Up/Down

[p]/[[]:Template

[ENTER]:Edit

Renaming input source

Select the input source that you want to

rename using jCursor B / C.

Press jENTER.

Use jCursor B / C to select the

characters you want to change, and use

jCursor D / E to enter those characters.

The following characters are available for input

source.

• A to Z, a to z

• 0 to 9

• Symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.)

• Space

Repeat step 4 until you have entered the

new input source name.

Confirm the new display name by

pressing jENTER. Press iSETUP to

exit the Setup menu.

To cancel a name change, press jRETURN.

;

InputRename

HDMI1.HDMI1

[p]/[[]:Position

[]/[]:Character

[ENTER]:Set

[RETURN]:Return

_________

En 59

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Goes enter standby mode automatically

when you leave it without operating

If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an

extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode

(Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is

“Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of

time to pass before this unit will enter standby.

■

Setting the brightness of the front panel

display

Sets the brightness of the front panel display. Lowering the setting

dims the display.

■

Adjusting the position of On-Screen

Display

Adjusts the top and bottom positions of menus displayed on the

TV.

Increase this value to raise the menu, or decrease the value to lower

it.

Setting the sound field program

You can set the parameters for the sound field programs (☞p. 60).

Prohibiting setting changes

Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made

to the settings on Setup menu.

AutoPowerDown

Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled.

4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated

this unit for four hours.

8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated

this unit for eight hours.

12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated

this unit for twelve hours.

This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the

standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the

countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the

timer.

Dimmer

Adjustable range -4 to 0

Default setting 0

OSD Shift

Adjustable range -5 to 0 to +5

Default setting 0

Off (Default) Settings are not protected.

On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until

it is returned to “Off.”

While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory

Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the

settings.

When this parameter is switched to “On,” “ ” appears while

the Setup menu is displayed on the TV.

MOVIE

SUR.

;

DolbyPL

xMovie

.Sci-Fi

DSPLevel

;;;;;;;;

0dB



Initialize

[]/[]:Select

;

MemoryGuard

Off>On

[RETURN]:Return



[p]/[[]:Select

En 60

SETUP

Although the sound field programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange the effect by setting the sound field elements (parameters).

To adjust the sound effects suitable for acoustical conditions of audio/video sources or rooms, perform the following operations.

Press iSETUP to display the Setup menu.

Use jCursor B / C to select “DSP

Parameter” and press jENTER.

Use jCursor D / E to choose the sound

field program you want to edit.

Press jCursor B / C to select the

parameter that you want to change, and

press jCursor D / E to change the

parameter. J1

Once you have completed editing, press

iSETUP to close the Setup menu.

Setting sound field program parameters

iSETUP

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

SETUP

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

STRAIGHT

No Parameter

Straight

MOVIE

.Standard

SUR.;DolbyPL

xMovie

DSPLevel;;;;;;;;0dB

Initialize

[p]/[[]:Select

Sound field program to be edited

When there are multiple parameters in the sound field

program you are configuring, repeat step 4 as

necessary to change other parameters.

MOVIE

Standard

SUR.;DolbyPL

xMovie

.*DSPLevel;;;;;;;+2dB

Initialize

[p]/[[]:Adjust

Sound field parameter

Choices

■ To initialize the sound field parameters

To set the parameters of the sound field program back

to default, press jCursor C repeatedly during

editing to select “Initialize” and press jCursor E.

When following message is displayed, press

jCursor E again to initialize.

To cancel operations, press jCursor D when “Press

Again” appears and return to the original display.

MOVIE

Standard

INITIALIZE

Pressagain[[]

toinitialize.

[[]:Done

[p]:Cancel

1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter

name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from

its default setting.

En 61

SETUP

Setting sound field program parameters

CINEMA DSP parameters

Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound field program

in the MOVIE category. J1

Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added).

You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the

sound effect.

Parameters usable in certain sound field

programs

2ch Stereo only

Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit

depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog

sound source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.

7ch Stereo only

Adjusts the center channel volume. J2

Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2

Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2

Adjusts the volume of the surround back channel. J2

Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only

Adjusts the effect level of the compressed music enhancer mode.

SUR.

Dolby PLIIxMovie

(Dolby PLII Movie)

Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder.

Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder.

DSP Level

Adjustable range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB

Default setting 0 dB

Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:

• The effect sound is too soft.

• There are no differences between effects of the sound field

programs.

→ Increase the effect level.

• The sound is dull.

• The sound field effect is added too much.

→ Reduce the effect level.

Direct

Auto (Default) Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone

control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and

“Treble” are set to 0dB.

Off Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control

circuit.

CT Level

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 100%

SL Level

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 100%

SR Level

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 100%

SB Level

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration)

50% (6.1-channel configuration)

Effect Level

High (Default) Standard effect.

Low Sets when the high-frequency signals of the source are

emphasized excessively.

1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE

sound field programs.

• Mono Movie

• Sports

• Action Game

• Roleplaying Game

2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.

En 62

SETUP

Setting sound field program parameters

Parameters usable in surround decoder

Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only

Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/

right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front

speakers for a wraparound effect.

Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right

speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0

for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7

for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.

Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and

the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level

created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred

sound balance.

The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more

negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value

more positive.

When Neo:6 Music is selected

Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as

necessary.

Panorama

Off (Default) Disables the effect.

On Enables the effect.

Center Width

Adjustable range 0 to 7

Default setting 3

Dimension

Adjustable range -3 to STD to +3

Default setting STD (Standard)

C.Image

Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0

Default setting 0.3

En 63

SETUP

You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).

The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.

Selecting input source connected to DVD

player

Selecting input source connected to CD

player

Keys connecting external

components

cSOURCE A

Switches an external component on and off.

Cursor, jENTER, jRETURN

Operates the menus of external components.

DISPLAY

Switches an external component display.

External component operation keys

Functions as a recording or playback key of an external

component, or a menu display key.

lNumeric keys

Functions as numeric keys of an external component.

mTV control keys J1

Default remote control code

settings

The following remote control codes are assigned to input

sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, please refer to “Remote

Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM.

Controlling other components with the remote control

bTRANSMIT

cSOURCE A

dInput selector

iSETUP

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

jRETURN

kExternal component

operation keys

kDISPLAY

lNumeric keys

mTV control keys

mINPUT

mMUTE

mTV VOL +/-

mTV CH +/-

qOPTION

OPTION

SETUP

RETURN

HDMI

AUDIO

TRANSMIT

1234

1256

V-AUX

TUNER

ENTER

7 856

1234

REC

ENT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK[ A ] [ B ]

EIVER

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

SLEEP

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an

external component, press iSETUP or qOPTION

and then try operating the remote control again.

Playback/Stop

DVD player

CD player

Playback/Stop

DVD player

CD player

The remote control keys for controlling external

components are available only when the external

components have corresponding control keys.

mINPUT Switches video inputs of TV.

mMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily.

mTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV.

mTV CH +/- Switches TV channels.

mA Turns on and off TV.

Input Category Manufacturer

Remote

control code

HDMI1 Blu-ray player/

recorder

Yamaha 2064

HDMI2 —— —

HDMI3 —— —

HDMI4 —— —

AV1 —— —

AV2 —— —

AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095

AV4 —— —

AV5 —— —

AV6 —— —

AUDIO1 —— —

AUDIO2 —— —

V-AUX —— —

A/B J2 —— —

DOCK DOCK Yamaha 5089

TUNER Tuner Yamaha 5085

1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to

dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in mA

(

mTV control keys).

To register a TV remote control code to

dInput selector:

You can use the

jCursor, lNumeric keys, and mTV

control keys to control a TV you have registered.

To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to

dInput selector:

You can use the

jCursor and lNumeric keys etc to control

external components, and the

mTV control keys to control

TVs registered in

mA.

2 : Use A/B for external component operations only. Set these keys to

remote control codes if you want to perform external component

operations without linking to input source selection of this unit.

For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes

for devices such as TVs.

En 64

SETUP

Controlling other components with the remote control

Registering remote control codes

for external component operations

The following section describes how to register remote

control code using an example of the registration of the

remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected

to HDMI2 jack.

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-

ROM to search the available remote control

codes from the category or manufacturer of

external components.

“2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.

Press nCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

Press dHDMI2 on the remote control to

switch the input source to HDMI2. J1

Perform the following steps to register the selected

input source here to the remote control code.

Enter a remote control code “2064” using

lNumeric keys. J2

Once the remote control code is registered successfully

the remote control will blink twice.

To switch between BD player linked to

scene selections, press hSCENE and at the

same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for

approximately 3 seconds.

Then you can operate the external components by

switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting

HDMI2 in the registered scene.

Same steps for operating other external components,

press

hSCENE and at the same time press the input

source key selected in step 3 and hold it for

approximately 3 seconds.

dHDMI2

hSCENE

lNumeric keys

mTV control keys

nCODE SET

SCENE

DVD

RADIO

7 856

1234

ENT

TV VOL TV CH

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

RECEIVER

PTI

ETU

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ENTER

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

• Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1

minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat

from step 2.

• Remote control code of an external component cannot

be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use

“Remote Control Code Search

” in the CD-ROM to

search the available remote control codes from the

category or manufacturer of external components.

• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first

code in the list, if it does not work then try the other

codes.

TRANSMIT

EIVER

LEEP

SOU

CODE SET

blinks twice

• If the registration fails, repeat the step 2.

• In case of an external component with multiple remote

control codes, the other remote control codes may be

supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote

control codes.

2 0

TRANSMIT

EIVER

LEEP

SOU

CODE SET

Registration successful: blinks twice

Registration failed: blinks 6 times

1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV

control keys, press

mA (mTV control keys) in step 3.

2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV

control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4.

En 65

SETUP

Controlling other components with the remote control

Resetting all remote control codes

Resetting all remote control codes for external

components to the initial factory settings.

Press nCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

Press iSETUP on the remote control.

Enter “9981” using lNumeric keys.

SETUP

lNumeric keys

nCODE SET

SETUP

7 856

1234

ENT

CODE SET

RECEIVER

PTI

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

ENTER

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1

minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat

from step 2.

TRANSMIT

EIVER

LEEP

SOU

CODE SET

blinks twice

Once the remote control code is reset successfully the

remote control will blink twice.

If setup fails, repeat from step 1.

9 9

TRANSMIT

EIVER

LEEP

SOU

CODE SET

Reset successful: blinks twice

Reset failed: blinks 6 times

En 66

SETUP

The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.

Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup

Switch this unit to the standby mode.

Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on

the front panel.

Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on

the front panel display.

After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are

displayed.

Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set

from the following items.

In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you

want to change.

Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then

switch it on again.

The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. If

initialization is selected, it will be performed when the unit is

powered on again.

Setting the impedance of speakers

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected. J3

Avoiding crossing remote control signals

when using multiple Yamaha receivers

The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a

receiver which has an identical ID (remote control ID). When using

multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control

with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote control ID for

all receivers, you can use one remote control to operate 2 receivers.

Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM AM

YPAO MIC

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM l / h

SP IMP. J1 Sets the impedance of speakers.

REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.

BI-AMP Switches the bi-amp connections on or off.

MON.CHK Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video

output.

TU J2 Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps.

INIT Initializes various settings for this unit.

6 MIN Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are

connected.

8 MIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are

connected.

SPIMP.-8MIN

ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in ID1.

ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in ID2.

ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by default. To

avoid crossing remote control, change the remote control ID for

both remote control and receiver.

REMOTEID-ID1

Continues to the

1 : U.S.A. and Canada models only.

2 : Asia and General models only.

3 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “(U.S.A. and

Canada models only) Changing speaker impedance” (☞

p. 12).

En 67

SETUP

Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)

High quality playback using bi-

amplification connections

Switches the bi-amp connections on or off. Refer to “Bi-

amp connection for front speakers” (☞

p. 13) for details.

Removing HDMI video output up-

scaling limits

Removes the up-scaling limitation on analog video

resolution when this unit and a TV are connected via

HDMI jacks.

If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be

detected when configuring the up-scaling settings, this

setting will remove the output limitation.

Changing FM/AM frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency

steps: J1

Initializing various settings for this

unit

Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it

back to default.

Select the items to be initialized from the following.

SETUP

lNumeric keys

nCODE SET

SETUP

7 856

1234

ENT

CODE SET

RECEIVER

PTI

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

ENTER

V V

P-

PLAY

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

■ To change the remote control ID

Press nCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

Press iSETUP on the remote control.

Enter the desired remote control ID code.

To switch to ID1:

Enter “5019” using

lNumeric keys.

To switch to ID2:

Enter “5020” using

lNumeric keys.

Once the remote control code is registered

successfully the remote control will blink twice.

Perform each of the following steps within

1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if

more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.

To reset, repeat from step 1.

TRANSMIT

EIVER

LEEP

SOU

CODE SET

Registration successful: blinks twice

Registration failed: blinks 6 times

• If setup fails, repeat from step 1.

• Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is

initialized (☞

p. 65).

ON Turns bi-amp connections on.

OFF (Default) Turns bi-amp connections off.

YES (Default) Video output signals of a resolution not

supported by the TV will not be

transmitted.

SKIP This unit ignores the TV’s support

capability and transmits input video

signals to the TV.

BI-AMP-OFF

MON.CHK-YES

AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by

steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of

100kHz.

AM9/FM50

(Default)

You can adjust the AM frequency by

steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz.

DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound

field programs.

VIDEO Resets video conversion settings

(resolution/aspect ratio) in the Setup

menu and the OSD menus display

position.

ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings.

CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize.

TU-AM9/FM50

INIT-CANCEL

1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM

tuning” (☞

p. 35).

En 68

SETUP

This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to

operate external components via HDMI. If you connect devices

that support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link-

compatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) J1, you can

use the following operations with the remote control of any of

those devices:

– Power synchronization (on/standby)

– Volume control, including Mute

– Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the

TV or this unit)

Connect the TV, DVD recorder supporting HDMI

Control to this unit’s HDMI output jack.

Turn on the TV and this unit.

Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external

components.

Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to

“On.”

Turn the TV off.

Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the

TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually.

Turn the TV on.

Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If

it is still off, turn it on manually.

Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that

is connected to this unit (ex. HDMI1).

If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control

function are connected to this unit, turn them on.

Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with

the TV through the following operations by using the

TV remote control.

• Power On/Off

• Volume Control

• Switching between audio output devices

Using the HDMI Control function

NOTE

The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,

and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and

DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below.

– Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”

– Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect

this unit to the TV

HDMI

Control signal

(such as volume control)

Remote control of TV

This unit

HDMI connection

Receiver unit Confirm that “Control” in the Setup menu (HDMI

Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 56). J2

TV/DVD Recorder Check the instruction manuals for those devices.

Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder

has been selected. If a different input source has been

selected, please change it manually.

TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is

being properly received by the TV.

Operations 1-7 will not be required more than twice.

If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,

check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both

devices.

If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and re-

plugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the

problem.

1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same

manufacturer whenever possible.

2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.”

En 69

SETUP

Using the HDMI Control function

■

Switching the input source on this

unit automatically when listening

to TV audio

When the HDMI Control (☞p. 68) is operating properly,

the input source of this unit is automatically changed to

match operations carried out on the TV. The default

input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is

connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can

enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.

To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry

out the following procedure.

Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI

cable.

Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.

The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s

audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the

TV.

Press iSETUP. J1

Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup”

and press jENTER.

Make sure that “Control” is selected, and

then use jCursor D / E to select “On.”

When “On” is selected, the following menu is

displayed.

Press jCursor C to select “TV Audio In”

and select the input jack connected in

step 2 using jCursor D / E.

Press iSETUP when you have finished

changing the settings.

If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this

unit will automatically switch to the input source

chosen in step 6.

iSETUP

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

SETUP

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLA

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

OPTICAL

(TV)

AV 4

NENT

VIDE

PTI

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AXIA

(CD

)

(BD

DVD)

DMI 2HDMI

HDMI

OUT

IDE

DOC

ANTENNA

NIT

NEN

VIDE

IDE

OPTICAL

Audio output

(Optical)

TV output jack Input jack

Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (default)

Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3

Analog stereo output AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2

OPTICAL OPTICAL

(TV)

AV 2

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

COAXIAL COAXIAL

(CD)

NENT

VIDE

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 1

HDMI

IDE

NTENNA

NIT

NENT

IDE

Available input jacks

;HDMI Setup

StandbyThrough

;

Off

.Control

;;;;;;;;;

Off

[p]/[[]:Select

AudioOutput

;;;;

Amp



Resolution

;;;

*Thrgh

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

;HDMI Setup

TV Audio In

;;;;;

AV4

.Control

;;;;;;;;;

[p]/[[]:Select

AudioReturnChan

;Off



Resolution

;;;

*Thrgh

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 49)

for details on the Setup menu.

En 70

SETUP

Using the HDMI Control function

■

Single HDMI cable input to TV

audio with Audio Return Channel

function

When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and

Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output

from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to

this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable

(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals

transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to

any input source.

Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI

cable.

Press iSETUP. J1

Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup”

and press jENTER.

Make sure that “Control” is selected, and

then use jCursor D / E to select “On.”

When “On” is selected, the following menu is

displayed.

Press jCursor C to select “TV Audio In”

and select the input source that you want to

assign to the HDMI audio signals from the

TV using jCursor D / E. J2

Press jCursor C to select

“AudioReturnChan” and press jCursor E

to select “On.”

The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.

Press iSETUP when you have finished

changing the settings.

If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this

unit will automatically switch to the input source

chosen in step 6.

iSETUP

jCursor B / C / D / E

jENTER

SETUP

ENTER

EIVER

PTI

RETURN

LUM

NHANCER

R. DE

TRAI

IRE

HDMI

AUDIO

RAN

MIT

SLEEP

V-A

PRESE

UNIN

TERE

ADI

V V

P-

PLA

SOURCE

DOCK

[

]

[

]

HDMI

OUT

ENTER

(BD

DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

HDMI 4

VIDE

SPEA

NTENN

NEN

VIDE

HDMI

TV audio

output

Video / Audio

output

;HDMI Setup

StandbyThrough

;

Off

.Control

;;;;;;;;;

Off

[p]/[[]:Select

AudioOutput

;;;;

Amp



Resolution

;;;

*Thrgh

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

;HDMI Setup

TV Audio In

;;;;;

AV4

.Control

;;;;;;;;;

[p]/[[]:Select

AudioReturnChan

;Off



Resolution

;;;

*Thrgh

[]/[]:Up/Down

[

1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 49)

for details on the Setup menu.

2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected

for the input source cannot be used.

En 71

APPENDIX

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The power will not

turn on.

The protection circuitry operated

3 times consecutively.

As a safety precaution, when the protection

circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the

capability to turn on the power is disabled.

Please contact your nearest Yamaha dealer

or service center to request repair.

—

The unit enters

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not completely

inserted.

Connect the power cable properly to an AC

wall outlet.

—

(When this unit is turned back on

and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is

displayed.) The protection

circuitry has been activated

because this unit was turned on

while a speaker cable was shorted.

Make sure that all speaker cables between

this unit and speakers are connected

properly.

This unit cannot be

turned off or does

not work properly.

The internal microcomputer is

hung-up due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or

excessive static electricity) or by a

drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC

wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then

plug it in again.

—

The batteries in the remote control

may have lost their charge.

Replace all batteries. 4

The unit enters

standby mode.

The protection circuitry has been

activated because of a short circuit,

etc.

Check that the speaker with an impedance

of at least 6Ω.

—

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Check that the speaker impedance settings

are correct.

After display of a

countdown on the

front panel, the unit

goes into standby

mode.

If you do not use take any action,

the Auto Power Down function

operates.

Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —

In the Setup menu “AutoPowerDown”

(“Function Setup” → “AutoPowerDown”),

increase the time until switching to standby

mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down

function.

Sound/images

suddenly go off.

The protection circuitry has been

activated because of a short circuit,

etc.

Check that the speaker wires are not

touching each other, then turn the unit back

on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off the

unit.

Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

En 72

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

If a DVI-HDMI cable is used to

connect the unit with an external

component, then it is necessary to

use an audio input jack for a

different input to output audio.

Display the HDMI Input Option menu for

the connected cable, select “Audio In,” and

select the jack to use for audio input.

Speaker connections are not

secure.

Secure the connections. 12

The HDMI components connected

to the unit do not support the

HDCP copy protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the

HDCP copy protection standards.

The audio input into the device is

set to playback through the TV.

In the Setup menu, set the HDMI Audio Out

(“Sound Setup” → “Audio Out”) to other

than “TV.”

No appropriate input source has

been selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

Input selector.

The volume is turned down or

muted.

Turn up the volume. —

Signals that this unit cannot

reproduce are being input from a

source component, such as a CD-

ROM.

Use an input source that has signals that can

be reproduced on this unit.

—

No picture. The video signal output from this

unit is not supported by a monitor

connected to this unit via the

HDMI OUT jack.

Displays the Advanced Setup menu and

select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video

parameters.

Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set

“MON.CHK” to “YES.”

An appropriate video input is not

selected on the TV.

Select an appropriate video input on the TV. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No sound is output

from a specific

speaker.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

Check the Speaker indicators on

the front panel display. If the

corresponding indicator lights up,

connect another speaker and check

if sound is output.

If sound is not output, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

The playback component or

speakers are not connected

properly.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

12, 18

Output from that speaker is

disabled.

Check the Speaker indicators on the front

panel display. If the corresponding indicator

is turned off, try the following.

1) Change to a different input source.

2) With the selected sound field program,

sound is not output from that speaker. Select

another sound field program.

3) “None” may have been selected for that

speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker

Setup” in the Setup menu, and set respective

parameters to enable output from that

speaker (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”).

7, 50

The volume of that speaker is set

to the minimum in “Speaker

Setup” in the Setup menu.

Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu

and adjust the volume (“Speaker Setup” →

“Level”).

(If hardly any sound comes from

one channel)

Speaker output balance is not set

correctly.

Balance the volume of each speaker from

“Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker Setup”

→ “Level”).

Sound may not be output from

certain channels, depending on the

input source or sound field

program.

Try another sound field program. 30

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When a monaural source sound

field program is applied, for some

surround decoders, sound from all

channels is output from the center

speaker.

Try another sound field program. 30

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

En 73

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

This unit is in straight decoding

mode and a monaural source is

being played back.

Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding

mode.

Sound may not be output from

certain channels depending on

input sources or sound field

programs.

Try another sound field program. 30

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Extended Surround” in the

Option menu is set to “Off,” or an

input signal does not contain a

surround back flag with “Extended

Surround” set to “Auto.”

Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off”

or “Auto.”

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

A subwoofer is not connected, or it

is inactive.

Check that a subwoofer is connected

correctly, and from the Setup menu

“Subwoofer” (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”

→ “Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to

“On.”

The subwoofer is turned off. Turn the subwoofer power on.

If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power

Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off

sensitivity settings.

—

The source does not contain LFE

(☞p. 78) or low frequency signals.

—

The right

combination of audio

/ video jacks to

connect cannot be

found.

Combine input connected to the

external component video output

with another input audio jack.

Display the Input Audio menu for the

connected video output, select “Audio In,”

and select the jack to use for audio input.

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format.

The connected component is not

set to output the desired digital

audio signals.

Set the playback component properly

referring to its instruction manual.

—

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency

equipment.

This unit is too close to other

digital or radio frequency

equipment.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Noise/hum noise is

heard.

Incorrect cable connection.

Connect the audio cables properly.

If the problem persists, the cables may be

defective.

—

A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly

input to this unit, only noise is output.

Connect the playback component to this

unit by digital connection and playback the

DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,

the problem may results from the playback

component. Consult the manufacturer of the

playback component.

2) When noise is output during playback or

skip operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display

the Option menu after selecting the input

source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.”

—

The volume cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The component connected to the

output jacks of this unit is not

turned on.

When the component connected to the

output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the

sound may be distorted, or the volume may

decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.

Turn on all components connected to this

unit.

—

“Max Volume” is set to a low

value.

Set it to a higher value. 55

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

En 74

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

HDMI™ Tuner (FM/AM)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The front panel

display HDMI

indicator is flashing.

An error with the HDMI

connection has occurred.

Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. —

Confirm that HDMI video that is not

supported by the unit is not being input

(HDMI Input → Option menu → “Signal

Info”).

No picture or sound. The number of components is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —

The connected HDMI component

does not support high-bandwidth

digital copyright protection

(HDCP).

Connect an HDMI component that supports

HDCP.

—

(When using HDMI

Control function)

TV sound is not

output from this unit

when operating the

remote control of the

TV.

The TV audio output is not

connected to this unit, or the

setting to match operations carried

out on TV is not set.

Connect the TV audio output to this unit,

and then select the connected input source

in “TV Audio In” (Setup menu → HDMI

Setup → TV Audio In).

(When using Audio Return

Channel function)

The Audio Return Channel

function is not working.

Make sure that your TV supports Audio

Return Channel.

Set the Audio Return Channel function to

on (Setup menu → HDMI Setup →

AudioReturnChan).

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception

is noisy.

You are too far from the station

transmitter, or the input from the

antenna is weak.

Check the antenna connections. 23

Switch to monaural mode. 36

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi-element antenna.

—

There is distortion,

and clear reception

cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or

place it in a different location.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

You are in an area far from a

station, or input from the antenna

is weak.

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi element antenna.

—

Use TUNING H / I to manually select the

station.

“No Presets” is

displayed.

No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as

preset stations before operation.

“Wrong Station” is

displayed.

An invalid FM/AM frequency has

been input.

Input a frequency that can be received. —

En 75

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

iPod™/iPhone™

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak, or the antenna

connections are loose.

Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 23

Use the manual tuning method. 35

Automatic station

preset does not

work.

Automatic station preset is not

available for AM stations.

Use manual station preset. 35

Continuous

crackling and

hissing noises are

heard.

The supplied AM loop antenna is

not connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly

even if you use an outdoor antenna.

The noises may be caused by

lightning, fluorescent lamps,

motors, thermostats, or other

electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,

but it can be reduced by installing and

properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.

Buzzing and whining

noises are heard.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

Display Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... The unit is in the process of

recognizing the connection with

your iPod/iPhone.

—

The unit is in the middle of

acquiring song lists from your

iPod/iPhone.

—

Connect error There is a problem with the signal

path from your iPod/iPhone to the

unit.

Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha

iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of

the unit.

Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock and then place it back in

the dock.

Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not

supported by the unit.

Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the

unit.

—

iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly

placed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock.

—

Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from

the Yamaha iPod universal dock.

—

Unable to play The unit cannot playback the

songs currently stored on your

iPod/iPhone.

Check that songs are currently stored on

your iPod/iPhone.

—

En 76

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

Bluetooth™ Remote control

Display Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching... The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver and the Bluetooth

component are in the process of

pairing.

—

The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver and the Bluetooth

component are in the process of

establishing a connection.

—

Completed The pairing is completed. —

Canceled The pairing is canceled. —

BT connected The connection between the

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver and the Bluetooth

component is established.

—

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is

disconnected from the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

—

Not found The Bluetooth component is not

found.

During pairing:

– pairing must be performed on the

Bluetooth component and this unit

simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth

component is in pairing mode.

During connecting:

– check if the Bluetooth component is

turned on.

– check if the Bluetooth component is

within 10 m (32 feet) of the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m / 20 ft, and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

—

Direct sunlight or lighting (from

an inverter type of fluorescent

lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking

the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this

unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4

The remote control ID of the

remote control and this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and

the remote control.

External components

cannot be controlled

using the remote

control.

The remote control code is not

correctly set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“Remote control code search” on the CD-

ROM.

—

Try setting another code for the same

manufacturer using “Remote control code

search” on the CD-ROM.

—

If this unit does not work when you press

Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following.

When the key does not work during DVD

disc menu operation: press the Input

selector again.

When the key does not work during Option

menu/Setup menu operation: press the key

corresponding to the current menu operation

again.

—

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some

models that do not respond to the

remote control.

—

En 77

APPENDIX

Audio information

Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that

involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video

signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user

adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video

syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization

automatically and accurately without user interaction.

Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One

amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the

other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this

arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This

restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each

amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely

independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and

center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range

audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,

referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-

channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the

surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic

range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5

full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using

digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement

and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a

5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers

of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete

5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel,

and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel

for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and

“Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel

playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes

available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce

realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo),

a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special

sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a

narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all

video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts.

The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal

processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel

to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for

high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an

optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition

home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby

TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio

simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of

Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel

sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS

decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical

48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers

sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-

channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and

motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of

movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining

popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural

spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system

produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left,

right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as

a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).

DTS Express

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray

discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the

case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling

you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while

playing the main program.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.

Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology

delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering

a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz

audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed

for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an

optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition

home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master

Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD

Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel

audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

Glossary

En 78

APPENDIX

Glossary

DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital

storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as

single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while

noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common

occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high

sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the

PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or

higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can

transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.

LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency

range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only

enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by

the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.

Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback

by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels

with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are

two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode”

for movie sources.

PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is

digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is

used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses

a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of

time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded

as pulses and then modulated for recording.

Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is

sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of

accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the

number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is

determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of

quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number

of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.

Sound field program information

CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for

use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many

speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as

room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so

widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.

Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses

Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby

Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie

theater in the listening room of your own home.

Compressed music enhancer

The Compressed music enhancer feature of this unit enhances your

listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression

artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss

of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for

headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field

program, so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you

to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by

using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a

center speaker.

Video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into

the Y signal for luminance and the P

B and PR signals for chrominance.

Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of

these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color

difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color

signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output

component signals.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the

three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and

synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component

transmits these three elements combined.

Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the

24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit

depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal

transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast

ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and

white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry

supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an

interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and

audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital

audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and

supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate

future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the

security requirements of content providers and system operators. For

further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://

www.hdmi.org/.”

S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using

a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance

and the C signal for the Cameroonians through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows

recording and playback of even more beautiful images.

“x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more

extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that

were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color

gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can

thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still

pictures and computer graphics.

En 79

APPENDIX

■ HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio

sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents

issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD

iPod™, iPhone™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark

of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a

license agreement.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,

etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

NOTES

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,

depending on the type of the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.

To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the

component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the

component).

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents

downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio

commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.

– 480i/60 Hz

– 576i/50 Hz

– 480p/60 Hz

– 576p/50 Hz

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

About trademarks

En 80

APPENDIX

■ Input jacks

• Analog audio

Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX)

• Digital audio

Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4)

Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX)

S-Video x 1 (AV5) [U.K. and Europe models]

Component x 2 (AV1, AV2)

•Other

HDMI x 4

DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite])

■ Output jacks

• Analog Audio

Speaker out x 7ch (FRONT L/R, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R

)

*1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

Subwoofer out x 1

AV O U T x 1

AUDIO OUT x 1

•Video

MONITOR OUT

- Component x 1

- Composite x 1

AV O U T

- Composite x 1

•Other

HDMI OUT x 1

■ HDMI

• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync,

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

- VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

• Analog up Conversion

- 480i/60 Hz (NTSC)

- 576i/50 Hz (PAL)

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• Up-Scaling

- 480i → 480p/720p/1080i/1080p

- 480p → 720p/1080i/1080p

- 576i → 576p/720p/1080i/1080p

- 576p → 720p/1080i/1080p

•Audio Format

- Dolby Digital

- DTS

- DSD 6ch

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby TrueHD

- DTS-HD

- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

■ Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

■ AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

FRONT L/R ......................................................................... 90 W/ch

CENTER................................................................................... 90 W

SURROUND L/R ................................................................ 90 W/ch

SURROUND BACK L/R .................................................... 90 W/ch

[Other models]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

FRONT L/R ......................................................................... 90 W/ch

CENTER................................................................................... 90 W

SURROUND L/R ................................................................ 90 W/ch

SURROUND BACK L/R .................................................... 90 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .....................................95/110/130/150 W

[Other models]

Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .............................................100/110/125 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[China, Korea, General and Asia models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ............................................................115 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...........................................................105 W

• IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]

Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .........................90 W+90 W

Specifications

En 81

APPENDIX

• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]

8 Ω ........................................................................................ 0.23 dB

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

AV5, etc .....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................... 2.0 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/470 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV5 to FRONT ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

AV5, etc. to FRONT (DIRECT)

[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ....... 0.06% or less

[Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω)............................. 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

AV5, etc. (DIRECT) Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)

...............................................................................100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) ........................... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control ...................................... MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB

• Tone Control (Front Speakers)

BASS Boost/Cut .............................................±10 dB/2 dB at 50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency.................................................... 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut......................................±10 dB/2 dB at 20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency.............................................. 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)............. 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)............................................................ 24 dB/oct.

■ VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ........................ NTSC

[Other models] ........................................................................... PAL

• Video Conversion...............................................................NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-Video [U.K. and Europe models]

..........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (P

B/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion Off) ............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

■ FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]............................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]............87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono .....................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo.................................................................. 74 dB/69 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3%

• Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω

■ AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] .....................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ........................................................531 to 1611 kHz

■ GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General models] ................. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models]..................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia models]......................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................270 W/320 VA

[Other models] ........................................................................280 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less

HDMI Control on / Standby Through off.....................1.2 W or less

HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on..........................3 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in)

• Weight

8.5 kg (18.7 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

En 82

APPENDIX

Numerics

5.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 11

5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10

6.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 11

6.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10

7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 11

7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10

Adaptive DRC, Sound Setup ....................................................... 54

Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 66

AM antenna connection ............................................................... 23

AM tuning .................................................................................... 35

Aspect, HDMI Setup.................................................................... 57

Audio In, Option menu ................................................................ 47

AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 14

Audio Output, HDMI Setup......................................................... 57

Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 70

AudioReturnChan, HDMI Setup ................................................. 56

Auto Preset................................................................................... 36

Auto Preset, Option menu............................................................ 48

Automatic traffic information reception ...................................... 39

AutoPowerDown, Function Setup ............................................... 59

BD player connection .................................................................. 18

Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 13

BI-AMP, Advanced Setup menu ................................................. 67

Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 43

Cable plug .................................................................................... 14

Center speaker................................................................................ 9

Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 12

CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................................ 7

Clear Preset, Option menu ........................................................... 48

COAXIAL jack ............................................................................ 14

COMPONENT VIDEO jack........................................................ 14

Config, Speaker Setup................................................................. 50

Connect, Option menu ................................................................ 48

Connecting speakers.................................................................... 11

Connections................................................................................... 9

Control, HDMI Setup.................................................................. 56

Cursor indicators ........................................................................... 7

Decoder Mode, Option menu...................................................... 46

Dimmer, Function Setup ............................................................. 59

Direct mode ................................................................................. 32

Disconnect, Option menu............................................................ 48

Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. 52

DSP Parameter ............................................................................ 60

DVD player connection............................................................... 18

Dynamic Range, Sound Setup..................................................... 55

Equalizer, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 52

Extended Surround, Option menu............................................... 46

External component connection.................................................. 14

FM antenna connection ............................................................... 23

FM Mode, Option menu.............................................................. 48

FM tuning.................................................................................... 35

Front panel .................................................................................... 5

Front panel display ........................................................................ 7

Front speaker................................................................................. 9

Function Setup ............................................................................ 58

HDMI Control function............................................................... 68

HDMI indicator............................................................................. 7

HDMI jack .................................................................................. 14

HDMI Setup ................................................................................ 55

High-frequency sound adjustment .............................................. 29

INIT, Advanced Setup menu....................................................... 67

Init.Volume, Sound Setup ........................................................... 55

Input Rename, Function Setup .................................................... 58

iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... 40

iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 40

Jack.............................................................................................. 14

Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... 52

Lipsync, Sound Setup.................................................................. 54

Low-frequency sound adjustment ............................................... 29

Manual Preset .............................................................................. 37

Max Volume, Sound Setup ......................................................... 55

Memory Guard ............................................................................ 59

Menu browse mode ..................................................................... 41

MON.CHK, Advanced Setup menu ............................................ 67

Multi information display.............................................................. 7

MUTE indicator ............................................................................ 7

Normal tuning.............................................................................. 35

OPTICAL jack ............................................................................ 14

Option menu ................................................................................ 45

OSD Shift, Function Setup.......................................................... 59

Pairing, Option menu .................................................................. 48

PHONES jack................................................................................ 5

Portable audio player connection ................................................ 22

PORTABLE jack......................................................................... 14

Index

En 83

APPENDIX

Index

Preset tuning................................................................................. 36

Radio Data System tuning ........................................................... 38

Rear panel ...................................................................................... 6

Remote control............................................................................... 8

Remote control battery installation ................................................ 4

Remote control, Controlling other components........................... 63

REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu.......................................... 66

Repeat playback, iPod/iPhone ..................................................... 42

Repeat, Option menu ................................................................... 48

Resolution, HDMI Setup ............................................................. 57

S VIDEO jack .............................................................................. 14

SCENE function........................................................................... 30

Setup menu................................................................................... 49

Shuffle playback, iPod/iPhone..................................................... 42

Shuffle, Option menu................................................................... 48

Signal Info, Option menu............................................................. 47

Simple play mode ........................................................................ 41

Sound field program .................................................................... 30

Sound field program parameter setting........................................ 60

Sound Setup ................................................................................. 54

SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu.................................................. 66

Speaker connection ........................................................................ 9

Speaker indicators.......................................................................... 7

Speaker layout.............................................................................. 10

Speaker setting ............................................................................. 24

Speaker Setup............................................................................... 50

Standby Charge, Option menu..................................................... 48

Standby Through, HDMI Setup................................................... 56

Straight decoding mode ............................................................... 31

Subwoofer ...................................................................................... 9

Supplied accessories ...................................................................... 4

Surround back speaker................................................................... 9

Surround speaker ........................................................................... 9

Test Tone, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 53

Tone control ................................................................................ 29

TrafficProgram, Option menu..................................................... 48

TU, Advanced Setup menu ......................................................... 67

Tuner indicator .............................................................................. 7

TV Audio In, HDMI Setup ......................................................... 56

TV monitor connection ............................................................... 15

VIDEO AUX input cover.............................................................. 4

Video cameras connection .......................................................... 22

Video conversion ........................................................................ 57

VIDEO jack................................................................................. 14

VOLTAGE SELECTOR............................................................... 6

VOLUME...................................................................................... 5

VOLUME indicator ...................................................................... 7

Volume Trim, Option menu........................................................ 46

YPAO.......................................................................................... 24

YC506B0/OMEN

- 1 -

A.R. Systems 0320

Acme 0342

Acura 0323, 0343

ADC 0337

Admiral 0054, 0178, 0336,

0337, 0339, 0346,

0347

Advent 0158

Adventura 0057

Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342

Agashi 0277, 0282

Agazi 0337

Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0342, 0343

Aim 0320

Aiwa 0078, 0379

Akai 0050, 0055, 0109,

0159, 0181, 0277,

0282, 0320, 0323,

0340, 0343, 0349,

0350

Akiba 0320, 0340

Akura 0320, 0323, 0337,

0340

Alaron 0277

Alba 0161, 0277, 0320,

0323, 0340, 0342,

0343, 0344, 0349,

0351, 0372, 0382

Albatron 0140

Alcyon 0171

Alleron 0059

Allorgan 0282

Allstar 0320, 0350

America Action 0179

AMOi 0276

Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321,

0342

Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337,

0340, 0343

Amtron 0058

Anam 0179, 0343

Anam National 0052, 0058

Anglo 0323, 0343

Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323,

0337, 0343

Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320,

0323, 0341, 0343

AOC 0008, 0026, 0050,

0053

Apex 0039, 0111, 0217

Arcam 0277, 0282

Arcam Delta 0342

Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350

Arthur Martin 0321

ASA 0339, 0347

Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350

Astra 0343

Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337,

0340, 0342

Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342,

0349, 0350

Atori 0323, 0343

Auchan 0321

Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320,

0340, 0342, 0343,

0349, 0350

AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342

Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194

Ausind 0171

Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337,

0339, 0342

Aventura 0051

Awa 0277, 0282

Axion 0156

Baird 0282

Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339

Basic Line 0282, 0320, 0323,

0340, 0343, 0350

Bastide 0282, 0342

Baur 0320, 0349

Bazin 0282

Beko 0161, 0269, 0294,

0302, 0311, 0320,

0328, 0351

Belcor 0008

Bell & Howell 0019, 0054

Benq 0097, 0242, 0361

Beon 0320, 0349, 0350

Best 0161

Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350

Binatone 0282, 0342

Blue Sky 0320, 0340

Blue Star 0348

Boots 0282, 0342

BPL 0320, 0348

Bradford 0058, 0179

Brandt 0322, 0345

Brillian 0182

Brinkmann 0320

Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349,

0350

Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342

Brockwood 0008

Broksonic 0109, 0179

Bruns 0339

BTC 0340

Bush 0269, 0282, 0283,

0304, 0320, 0323,

0328, 0332, 0340,

0343, 0344, 0346,

0348, 0349, 0350,

0372, 0382, 0463,

0470, 0472

Candle 0008, 0026, 0050,

0057

Capsonic 0337

Carena 0320

Carnivale 0050

Carrefour 0344

Carver 0010

Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343

Casio 0367

Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350

CCE 0183, 0282

Celebrity 0055, 0107

Celera 0039

Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350

Century 0339

CGE 0161, 0171

Changhong 0039

Chimei 0273

Cimline 0323, 0343

Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026,

0050, 0058

City 0323, 0343

Clarion 0179

Clarivox 0349

Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282,

0320, 0323, 0337,

0340, 0342, 0343,

0350, 0351

CMS 0277

CMS Hightec 0282

Coby 0197

Colortyme 0008, 0026

Commercial Solutions

0021

Concerto 0008, 0026

Concorde 0323, 0343

Condor 0161, 0277, 0320,

0323, 0342, 0350,

0351

Contec 0179, 0277, 0323,

0342, 0343, 0344

Contec/Cony 0012, 0058

Continental Edison

0345

Cosmel 0323, 0343

Craig 0058, 0179

Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171,

0339

Crown 0058, 0161, 0171,

0179, 0320, 0323,

0343, 0349, 0350,

0351

CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342

CTC Clatronic 0341

CTX 0205

Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010,

0019, 0021, 0026,

0049, 0050, 0178

CXC 0058, 0179

Cybertron 0340

Cytron 0152

Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026,

0037, 0053, 0167,

0266, 0275, 0277,

0282, 0315, 0320,

0323, 0331, 0335,

0342, 0343, 0350,

0381, 0465

Dainichi 0277, 0340

Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320,

0337, 0349, 0350

Dantax 0161, 0349

Dawa 0320

Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026,

0323, 0343

De Graaf 0346

Decca 0282, 0320, 0342,

0349, 0350

Dell 0145, 0245

Denver 0358, 0362

Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350

Diamant 0320

Diamond 0277

DiamondVision 0135, 0143

Dimensia 0049

Disney 0219

Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323,

0343, 0349, 0350

Dream Vision 0461, 0498

DTS 0323, 0343

Dual 0282, 0320, 0342

Dual-Tec 0342, 0343

Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062,

0282, 0339, 0341,

0342

Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179,

0215

Dux 0349

Dwin 0178

Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350

Dynex 0228, 0231

Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282,

0320

Elcit 0339

Electa 0348

ELECTRO TECH

0343

Electroband 0055, 0107

Electrograph 0176

Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052,

0055

Element 0230

Elin 0277, 0320, 0323,

0342, 0349, 0350

Elite 0320, 0340, 0350

Elman 0341

Elta 0277, 0323, 0343

Emerson 0000, 0007, 0008,

0012, 0013, 0019,

0026, 0031, 0037,

0051, 0058, 0059,

0161, 0179, 0320,

0339

Emprex 0154

Envision 0008, 0026, 0050

Epson 0155, 0206, 0359

Erres 0320, 0349, 0350

ESA 0051

ESC 0282

Etron 0343

Eurofeel 0282

Euro-Feel 0337

Euroline 0349

Euroman 0161, 0277, 0282

Euromann 0320, 0337, 0342,

0350

Europhon 0277, 0282, 0320,

0341, 0342, 0350

Expert 0321

Exquisit 0320

Fenner 0323, 0343

Ferguson 0322, 0345, 0349

Fidelity 0277, 0320, 0342,

0346

Filsai 0282

Finlandia 0346

Finlux 0171, 0282, 0320,

0339, 0341, 0342,

0349, 0350

FIRST LINE 0342, 0343, 0350

Firstline 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323

Fisher 0019, 0161, 0282,

0339, 0342, 0344,

0351

Flint 0320, 0350

Formenti 0171, 0277, 0336,

0339, 0342, 0349

Formenti/Phoenix

0277

Fortress 0336, 0339

Fraba 0161, 0320

Friac 0161

Frontech 0282, 0323, 0337,

0343, 0346, 0347

Fujitsu 0059, 0069, 0074,

0075, 0282

Fujitsu General 0282

Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507,

0510, 0511

Funai 0051, 0058, 0059,

0112, 0113, 0115,

0118, 0119, 0179,

0337

Futuretech 0058, 0179

Galaxi 0320, 0351

Galaxis 0161, 0320

Gateway 0176, 0177, 0241

GBC 0323, 0343, 0344

GE 0008, 0021, 0023,

0026, 0027, 0031,

0034, 0049, 0052,

0056, 0209

Geant Casino 0321

GEC 0282, 0320, 0342,

0347, 0349, 0350

Geloso 0323, 0343, 0346

General Technic 0323, 0343

List of remote control codes

Liste des codes de commande

Liste der Fernbedienungscodes

Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder

Elenco dei codici di telecomando

Lista de códigos de mando a distancia

Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes

- 2 -

Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347,

0350

GFM 0128, 0227

Giant 0282

Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050,

0062

GoldHand 0277

Goldline 0320

GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012,

0026, 0031, 0050,

0053, 0161, 0277,

0282, 0320, 0323,

0342, 0343, 0346,

0349, 0350

Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282,

0320, 0323, 0337,

0343, 0344, 0349,

0350, 0462, 0473,

0477

Gorenje 0161, 0351

GPM 0340

GPX 0129

Gradiente 0240

Graetz 0347

Granada 0171, 0282, 0320,

0321, 0342, 0344,

0346, 0349, 0350

Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348,

0349

Gronic 0282

Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171,

0310, 0320

Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179

Haier 0157, 0233

Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337,

0342

Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031

Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342

Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282,

0320, 0323, 0342,

0343, 0344, 0349,

0350

Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343

Hantor 0320

Harman/Kardon 0010

Harvard 0058, 0179

Harwood 0320, 0323

Havermy 0178

HCM 0282, 0320, 0323,

0337, 0342, 0343,

0348

Hema 0282, 0323

Hewlett Packard 0192

Higashi 0277

HiLine 0320

Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340,

0343, 0344, 0349,

0350

Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348

Hisense 0247

Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026,

0066, 0084, 0092,

0093, 0120, 0172,

0173, 0255, 0270,

0271, 0282, 0320,

0335, 0338, 0342,

0344, 0346, 0347,

0365, 0382, 0448,

0456, 0467

Hornyphon 0320, 0350

Hoshai 0340

Huanyu 0277, 0342

Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342

Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323,

0342, 0343

Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321,

0337, 0342, 0348,

0349, 0350

Hyundai 0141

Iberia 0320

ICE 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0337, 0340,

0342, 0343, 0350

ICeS 0277

Ilo 0148, 0153

IMA 0058

Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320,

0347, 0350, 0351

Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350

Infinity 0010

InFocus 0250, 0327, 0363,

0479, 0508

Ingelen 0347

Ingersol 0323, 0343

Initial 0153

Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0340, 0342,

0343, 0349, 0350

Innovation 0337, 0343

Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236,

0238

Inteq 0030

Interactive 0161

Interbuy 0323, 0343

Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339,

0347, 0349, 0350

International 0277

Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320,

0337, 0341, 0342

Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323,

0340, 0343, 0349,

0350

Isukai 0320, 0340

ITC 0282, 0342

ITS 0277, 0320, 0340,

0348, 0350

ITT 0343, 0347

ITV 0320, 0343, 0349

Janeil 0057

JBL 0010

JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026,

0027, 0049, 0053,

0056

JCB 0055, 0107

Jensen 0008, 0026

JVC 0012, 0014, 0015,

0056, 0064, 0065,

0067, 0169, 0174,

0297, 0314, 0344,

0350, 0375

Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0340, 0342,

0343, 0348

Kamosonic 0342

Kamp 0277, 0342

Kapsch 0347

Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342,

0343, 0349

Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055,

0277

KEC 0179

Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341,

0346

Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050

KIC 0282

Kingsley 0277, 0342

KLH 0039

Kloss Novabeam

0057, 0058

Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320

Kolster 0320, 0350

Konka 0340

Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350

Korting 0161, 0339

Kosmos 0320

Koyoda 0343

KTV 0007, 0050, 0058,

0179, 0183, 0282,

0342

Kyoto 0277, 0282

Lasat 0161

Lenco 0323, 0343

Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343

Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349,

0350

LG 0031, 0053, 0066,

0116, 0117, 0140,

0161, 0164, 0175,

0195, 0269, 0277,

0282, 0300, 0309,

0317, 0320, 0323,

0328, 0342, 0343,

0346, 0349, 0350,

0366, 0368, 0377,

0466, 0471, 0478

LG/GoldStar 0164

Liesenk 0349

Liesenkotter 0320

Life 0337, 0343

Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337,

0343

Lloyds 0323

Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265,

0320, 0330, 0352

Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350

Logik 0054

Luma 0320, 0323, 0346,

0349

Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346,

0349, 0350

Lux May 0350

Luxman 0008, 0026

Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346

LXI 0010, 0019, 0021,

0026, 0027, 0031,

0049, 0111

M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345,

0347, 0349, 0350

MAG 0096

Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349

Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341,

0342

Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010,

0013, 0026, 0032,

0033, 0048, 0050,

0128, 0211, 0212,

0224, 0226, 0239

Magnum 0337, 0343

Majestic 0054

Mandor 0337

Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337,

0342, 0349, 0350

Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026,

0050, 0204, 0320,

0349, 0350

Marelli 0339

Mark 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0349, 0350

Masuda 0282

Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323,

0342, 0343, 0344,

0346, 0349, 0350,

0455

Matsushita 0017

Maxent 0147, 0176

Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350

Medion 0320, 0337, 0343

Megapower 0140

Megatron 0026, 0031

MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323

Melvox 0321

Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031,

0053, 0054, 0137,

0215, 0323, 0343

Memphis 0323, 0343

Mercury 0320, 0323

Metz 0339

MGA 0008, 0026, 0031,

0050, 0053

Micromaxx 0337, 0343

Microstar 0337, 0343

Midland 0007, 0021, 0023,

0027, 0030, 0056,

0062

Minerva 0171

Minoka 0320, 0350

Mintek 0153

Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031,

0053, 0066, 0084,

0093, 0098, 0150,

0178, 0289, 0320,

0339, 0344, 0350,

0376

Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171,

0277, 0282, 0342

Monivision 0140

Montgomery Ward

0054

Motion 0171

Motorola 0052, 0178

MTC 0008, 0026, 0050,

0053, 0161, 0277

Multi System 0349

Multitech 0058, 0161, 0179,

0183, 0277, 0282,

0320, 0323, 0341,

0342, 0343, 0344,

0346, 0349

Murphy 0277, 0342

NAD 0026, 0031, 0111

Naonis 0346

NEC 0008, 0026, 0050,

0052, 0053, 0072,

0103, 0282, 0344

Neckermann 0161, 0282, 0320,

0339, 0342, 0346,

0349, 0350, 0351

NEI 0320, 0349, 0350

Net-TV 0176

Neufunk 0320, 0323

New Tech 0343, 0350

New World 0340

NewTech 0282, 0320, 0323

Nicamagic 0277, 0342

Nikkai 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0337, 0340,

0342, 0349, 0350

Nikko 0026, 0031, 0050

Nobliko 0171, 0277, 0341,

0342

Nokia 0347

Norcent 0201

Nordic 0282

Nordmende 0339, 0345, 0347,

0350

Nordvision 0349

Novatronic 0320

Oceanic 0321, 0347

Okano 0161, 0320, 0351

Olevia 0102, 0199, 0200,

0207, 0222

ONCEAS 0342

Onwa 0058, 0179

Opera 0320

Oppo 0130

Optimus 0017, 0019

Optoma 0144

Optonica 0178

Orbit 0320, 0350

Orion 0043, 0146, 0283,

0320, 0323, 0328,

0343, 0349, 0350

Orline 0320

Osaki 0282, 0320, 0337,

0340, 0342

Oso 0340

Otto Versand 0282, 0320, 0336,

0342, 0344, 0348,

0349, 0350

Pael 0277, 0342

Palladium 0161, 0282, 0320,

0342, 0351

Palsonic 0282

Panama 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0337, 0342,

0343

Panasonic 0016, 0017, 0020,

0022, 0023, 0035,

0052, 0056, 0084,

0085, 0133, 0163,

0193, 0284, 0286,

0290, 0292, 0320,

0325, 0347, 0356

Panavision 0320

Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277,

0321, 0342

Pausa 0323, 0343

Penney 0021, 0023, 0031,

0050, 0111

Perdio 0277, 0320

Perfekt 0320

Philco 0008, 0009, 0010,

0012, 0026, 0050,

0052, 0053, 0161,

0171, 0320, 0339

Philharmonic 0282, 0342

Philips 0008, 0009, 0010,

0011, 0012, 0032,

0048, 0049, 0052,

0122, 0128, 0134,

0186, 0187, 0213,

0221, 0224, 0226,

- 3 -

0239, 0256, 0257,

0259, 0261, 0263,

0267, 0280, 0281,

0287, 0296, 0299,

0301, 0303, 0305,

0313, 0319, 0320,

0324, 0333, 0339,

0342, 0349, 0350,

0353, 0357, 0360,

0380, 0383, 0452,

0459, 0460

Philips Magnavox

0011, 0032, 0033

Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320,

0339, 0349, 0350

Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339,

0349, 0350

Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050

Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094,

0095, 0161, 0320,

0345, 0347, 0349,

0350, 0458

Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337,

0350

Playsonic 0282

Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202,

0234

Poppy 0323, 0343

Portland 0007, 0008, 0026,

0053

Prandoni-Prince

0171, 0346

Precision 0282, 0342

Prima 0157, 0243, 0323,

0343, 0347

Princeton 0140

Prism 0023, 0056

Profex 0323, 0343

Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350

Proline 0320, 0350

Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049

Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282,

0320, 0342, 0349

Protech 0282, 0337, 0341,

0342, 0343, 0349,

0350

Proton 0008, 0012, 0026,

0031

Protron 0196

PROVIEW 0096, 0246

Provision 0320, 0349

Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062

Pye 0256, 0320, 0349,

0350, 0378

Pymi 0323, 0343

Quandra Vision 0321

Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052,

0056

Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337,

0342, 0349, 0350

Questa 0344

Radialva 0320

RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031,

0050, 0179, 0320

RadioShack/Realistic

0007, 0008, 0012,

0026, 0049, 0058

Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349,

0350

Radiomarelli 0320, 0339

Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323,

0350

Rank 0344

RCA 0008, 0021, 0024,

0025, 0026, 0027,

0042, 0049, 0052,

0053, 0063, 0136,

0225

Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050,

0179

Recor 0320

Redstar 0320

Reflex 0320

Revox 0161, 0320, 0349,

0350

Rex 0337, 0346, 0347

RFT 0161, 0168, 0339

Rhapsody 0277

R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350

Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340,

0343

Robotron 0339

Rowa 0277, 0282

Royal Lux 0161

RTF 0339

Runco 0030, 0050, 0062

Saba 0298, 0322, 0339,

0345, 0347

Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337,

0342, 0343

Salora 0346, 0347

Sambers 0171, 0341

Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026,

0050, 0176

Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006,

0007, 0008, 0012,

0026, 0031, 0036,

0050, 0053, 0076,

0077, 0079, 0114,

0124, 0125, 0126,

0127, 0139, 0161,

0183, 0185, 0190,

0191, 0258, 0264,

0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0334, 0337,

0342, 0343, 0349,

0350, 0351, 0373,

0453, 0468

Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342

Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320,

0350

Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068,

0070, 0071, 0099,

0161, 0168, 0223,

0237, 0277, 0282,

0288, 0295, 0323,

0342, 0344, 0369,

0469

SBR 0320, 0349

Sceptre 0235, 0244

Schaub Lorenz 0347

Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318,

0320, 0333, 0340,

0342, 0349, 0350,

0382

Scotch 0026, 0031

Scott 0008, 0012, 0026,

0031, 0058, 0059,

0149, 0179

Sears 0008, 0010, 0019,

0021, 0026, 0027,

0031, 0049, 0051,

0059, 0111

SEG 0277, 0282, 0320,

0323, 0337, 0341,

0342, 0344, 0349,

0382

SEI 0320

SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347

Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347

Sencora 0323, 0343

Sentra 0323

Serino 0277

Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002,

0003, 0007, 0008,

0012, 0026, 0060,

0088, 0089, 0091,

0138, 0165, 0170,

0178, 0198, 0229,

0262, 0278, 0279,

0291, 0308, 0312,

0336, 0344, 0354,

0370, 0449, 0450,

0451, 0464, 0474,

0476

Sheng Chia 0178

Shogun 0008

Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341

Sierra 0320, 0350

Siesta 0161

Signature 0054

Silva 0277

Silver 0344

Singer 0321, 0339, 0341

Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341,

0349

Skantic 0347

Solavox 0347

Sonitron 0161, 0282

Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323,

0337, 0342, 0343,

0349, 0350

Sonolor 0321, 0347

Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349,

0350

Sony 0038, 0044, 0045,

0047, 0055, 0104,

0105, 0107, 0110,

0123, 0184, 0220,

0248, 0249, 0251,

0252, 0254, 0326,

0343, 0344, 0371,

0374, 0457, 0475

Sound & Vision 0340, 0341

Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031,

0058, 0059, 0179

Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350

Squareview 0051

SSS 0008, 0058, 0179

Standard 0282, 0320, 0323,

0340, 0342, 0343,

0350

Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320,

0323, 0349

Stenway 0348

Stern 0346, 0347

Strato 0320, 0323

Stylandia 0282

Sunkai 0343

Sunstar 0320, 0323

Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343,

0350

Superla 0277, 0282, 0342

Superscan 0013, 0178

SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323

Supra 0323, 0343

Supre-Macy 0057

Supreme 0055, 0107

Susumu 0340

Sutron 0323, 0343

SVA 0151

Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342

Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010,

0011, 0013, 0026,

0048, 0050, 0051,

0128, 0227, 0253

Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062,

0128, 0179, 0215

Syntax 0199

Syntax-Brillian 0199

Sysline 0349

Sytong 0277

Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336,

0340, 0342, 0347

Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342,

0344, 0346

Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282,

0320, 0342, 0349,

0350

TCM 0337, 0343

Teac 0282, 0320

Tec 0282, 0323, 0342,

0343

Technics 0017, 0023, 0056

TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497,

0499

Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026,

0056

TEDELEX 0282

Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010,

0012, 0026, 0053,

0054, 0058, 0059,

0179

Teleavia 0345

Telecor 0282, 0320

Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345,

0350

Telegazi 0320

Telemeister 0320

Telesonic 0320

Telestar 0320

Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343,

0349

Teleton 0282, 0342

Televideon 0277

Televiso 0321

Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323,

0340, 0343, 0350

Tesmet 0350

Tevion 0337, 0343

Texet 0277, 0282, 0323,

0342

Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189,

0285, 0320, 0322,

0342, 0345, 0350

Thorn 0320, 0349

TMK 0008, 0026, 0031

TNCi 0030

Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350

Tokyo 0277, 0342

Tomashi 0348

Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040,

0041, 0046, 0073,

0100, 0103, 0108,

0109, 0111, 0121,

0132, 0166, 0208,

0210, 0214, 0217,

0260, 0268, 0282,

0283, 0293, 0304,

0306, 0307, 0329,

0344, 0355, 0454

Totevision 0007

Towada 0282, 0347

Trakton 0282

Trans Continens 0282, 0320

Transtec 0277

Trident 0282

Triumph 0320

Uher 0161, 0171, 0320,

0347, 0350

Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339,

0341, 0342

Unic Line 0320

United 0349

Universum 0161, 0171, 0282,

0320, 0337, 0349,

0350, 0351

Univox 0320

Vector Research 0050

Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346,

0347, 0349, 0350,

0351

Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343,

0349

Victor 0015, 0344, 0350

VIDEOLOGIC 0277

Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340,

0342

VideoSystem 0320, 0350

Videotechnic 0277, 0282

Vidikron 0010

Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031,

0053

Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232,

0364

Viking 0057

Viore 0148

Visiola 0277, 0342

Vision 0282, 0320, 0350

Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218,

0242, 0500, 0501,

0502, 0503, 0506

Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350

Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339,

0346, 0347, 0350

Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342

Wards 0008, 0009, 0010,

0026, 0031, 0048,

0049, 0050, 0053,

0054, 0059

Watson 0320, 0349, 0350

Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342

Waycon 0111

Wega 0320, 0339, 0344

Wegavox 0323

Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349,

0350

Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220

White Westinghouse

0037, 0090, 0277,

0320, 0341, 0342,

0349

Wincom 0101, 0106

Xrypton 0320

- 4 -

Yamaha 0008, 0026, 0050,

0053, 0080, 0081,

0082, 0083, 0086,

0087

Yamishi 0282, 0320

Yok an 03 20

Yoko 0161, 0277, 0282,

0320, 0323, 0337,

0340, 0342, 0343,

0349, 0350

Yorx 0340

Zanussi 0282, 0346

Zenith 0008, 0028, 0029,

0030, 0031, 0054,

0061, 0062

VCR

ABS 1016

Adventura 1069

Adyson 1008

Aiwa 1024, 1026, 1027,

1069

Akai 1021, 1027

Akiba 1008, 1029

Akura 1008, 1027, 1029

Alba 1008, 1009, 1024,

1025, 1029, 1030

Alienware 1016

Ambassador 1030

American High 1068

Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026

Anitech 1008, 1029

Apex 1088

ASA 1028, 1031

Asha 1070

Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028,

1029, 1031

Audio Dynamics 1064

Audiosonic 1009

Audiovox 1071

Baird 1009, 1025, 1026,

1027

Bang & Olufsen 1017

Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024,

1025, 1029, 1030

Baur 1028

Beaumark 1070

Bell & Howell 1065

Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030

Black Panther Line

1009, 1025

Blaupunkt 1028

Bondstec 1008, 1030

Broksonic 1100

Bush 1008, 1009, 1024,

1025, 1029, 1049,

1051, 1063, 1217

Calix 1071

Candle 1070, 1071

Canon 1068

Cathay 1009

Catron 1030

CGE 1026, 1027

Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029

CineVision 1104

Citizen 1070, 1071

Clatronic 1008, 1030

Colortyme 1064

Condor 1009, 1025, 1030

Craig 1070, 1071

Crown 1008, 1009, 1025,

1029, 1030

Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070

Cybernex 1070

CyberPower 1016

Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030,

1038, 1069, 1223

Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029

Dantax 1024

Daytron 1009, 1025

DBX 1064

De Graaf 1028

Decca 1026, 1027, 1028

Dell 1016

Denko 1008

DiamondVision 1096

DigiFusion 1014

DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110,

1111, 1113, 1116,

1122

Dish Network 1018

Dishpro 1018

Dual 1009, 1027, 1028

Dumont 1026, 1028

Durabrand 1114

Dynatech 1069

Echostar 1018

Elbe 1009

Elcatech 1008

Electrohome 1071

Electrophonic 1071

Elsay 1008

Elta 1008, 1009, 1029

Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068,

1069, 1071

ESC 1009, 1025

Etzuko 1008, 1029

Expressvu 1018

Ferguson 1027

Fidelity 1008, 1026

Finlandia 1028

Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028

Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029,

1031

Fisher 1065

Flint 1024

Formenti/Phoenix

1028

Frontech 1030

Fuji 1068

Fujitsu 1026

Funai 1026, 1069

Galaxy 1026

Garrard 1069

Gateway 1016

GBC 1029, 1030

GE 1068, 1070

GEC 1028

Geloso 1029

General 1030

General Technic 1024

GOI 1018

GoldHand 1008, 1029

Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064,

1071

Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025,

1026, 1029, 1030,

1031

Gradiente 1069

Graetz 1027

Granada 1028

Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025,

1026, 1029, 1030,

1031

Grundig 1028, 1029

Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031

Harley Davidson 1069

Harman/Kardon 1064

Harwood 1008

HCM 1008, 1029

Headquarter 1065

Hewlett Packard 1016

Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024,

1029

Hisawa 1024

Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027,

1028, 1046, 1062

HNS 1110

Howard Computers

1016

HP 1016

HTS 1018

Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122

Hughes Network Systems

1110, 1116

Humax 1012, 1110, 1113

Hush 1016

Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024,

1029

iBUYPOWER 1016

Impego 1030

Imperial 1026

Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025,

1028, 1029, 1030

Innovation 1024

Instant Replay 1068

Interbuy 1008, 1031

Interfunk 1028

Intervision 1009, 1026

Irradio 1008, 1029, 1031

ITT 1027

ITV 1009, 1025, 1031

JC Penney 1064, 1065, 1068,

1070, 1071

JCL 1068

JVC 1007, 1018, 1027,

1039, 1064, 1065,

1066, 1067, 1078,

1089, 1092, 1093,

1094, 1095, 1113,

1208, 1209, 1212,

1213, 1215, 1218

Kaisui 1008, 1029

Karcher 1028

Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025,

1030

Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065

Kodak 1068, 1071

Korpel 1008, 1029

Kyoto 1008

Lenco 1025

Leyco 1008, 1029

LG 1010, 1026, 1031,

1047, 1054, 1056,

1071, 1103, 1221

Lifetec 1024

Linksys 1016

Lloyd's 1069

Loewe Opta 1028, 1031

Logik 1008, 1029

Lumatron 1009, 1025

Luxor 1008

LXI 1071

M Electronic 1026

Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114,

1126

Magnin 1071

Manesth 1008, 1029

Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065,

1068

Mark 1009

Marta 1071

Matsui 1024, 1031

Matsushita 1068

Media Center PC

1016

Mediator 1028

Medion 1024

MEI 1068

Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031,

1065, 1068, 1069,

1070, 1071, 1098,

1114

Memphis 1008, 1029

MGN Technology

1070

Micromaxx 1024

Microsoft 1016

Microstar 1024

Migros 1026

Mind 1016

Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079

Motorola 1068

MTC 1070

Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028,

1029, 1030, 1069,

1070

Murphy 1026

NEC 1027, 1064, 1065

Neckermann 1027, 1028

NEI 1028

Nesco 1008, 1029

Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030

Nikko 1071

Niveus Media 1016

Noblex 1070

Nokia 1009, 1027

Nordmende 1027

Northgate 1016

Oceanic 1026, 1027

Okano 1008, 1009, 1024

Olympus 1068

Optimus 1071

Orion 1023, 1024, 1051,

1115, 1217

Orson 1026

Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029,

1031

Otto Versand 1028

Palladium 1008, 1027, 1029,

1031

Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044,

1055, 1068, 1072,

1085, 1090, 1091,

1120, 1121, 1214

Pathe Marconi 1027

Perdio 1026

Philco 1008, 1068

Philips 1006, 1013, 1028,

1035, 1040, 1045,

1046, 1050, 1058,

1059, 1061, 1068,

1076, 1101, 1110,

1113, 1116, 1117,

1122, 1126, 1210,

1211

Philips Magnavox

1076

Phonola 1028

Pilot 1071

Pioneer 1028, 1036

Polaroid 1088, 1099

Portland 1009, 1025, 1030

Prinz 1026

Profex 1029

Proline 1026

Proscan 1019

Prosonic 1009, 1024

Pulsar 1114

Pye 1028, 1102

Quarter 1065

Quartz 1065

Quasar 1068

Quelle 1026, 1028

Radialva 1008

RadioShack 1071

RadioShack/Realistic

1065, 1068, 1069,

1070, 1071

Radiola 1028

Radix 1071

Randex 1071

RCA 1019, 1068, 1070,

1075, 1110, 1113,

1122, 1125

Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069,

1070, 1071

ReplayTV 1022, 1123

Rex 1027

RFT 1008, 1028, 1030

Ricavision 1016

Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025,

1029, 1031

Royal 1008

Runco 1114

Saba 1027

Saisho 1024, 1029

Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041,

1043, 1057, 1060,

1070, 1084, 1110,

1116, 1122, 1124,

1220, 1222

Samurai 1008, 1030

Sanky 1114

Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106,

1115

Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070

Saville 1009

SBR 1028

Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027

Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024,

1025, 1026, 1028,

1029, 1030, 1031

Sears 1065, 1068, 1071

SEG 1008, 1009, 1029

SEI-Sinudyne 1028

Seleco 1027

Sentra 1008, 1030

Sentron 1008, 1029

Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077,

1107, 1127, 1219

Shintom 1008, 1029

Shivaki 1031

Shogun 1070

Siemens 1031

Silva 1031

Silver 1009

Singer 1068

- 5 -

Sinudyne 1028

Solavox 1030

Sonic Blue 1022, 1123

Sonneclair 1008

Sonoko 1009, 1025

Sontec 1031

Sony 1001, 1016, 1048,

1053, 1073, 1074,

1080, 1081, 1082,

1083, 1108, 1118,

1216

Stack 1016

Stack 9 1016

Standard 1009, 1025

Stern 1009

STS 1068

Sunkai 1024

Sunstar 1026

Suntronic 1026

Sunwood 1008, 1029

Superscan 1020

Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069,

1102, 1126

Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126

Systemax 1016

Tagar Systems 1016

Taisho 1024

Tandberg 1009

Tandy 1065

Tashiko 1026, 1071

Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028

TCM 1015, 1024, 1042

Teac 1009, 1069

Tec 1008, 1009, 1030

Technics 1068

Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071

Teleavia 1027

Telefunken 1027

Teletech 1008, 1009

Tenosal 1008, 1029

Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029,

1031

Tevion 1024

Thomson 1005, 1027

Thorn 1027

Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111,

1113, 1117, 1118,

1119, 1122

TMK 1070

Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031

Tonsai 1029

Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027,

1028, 1037, 1049,

1052, 1086, 1087,

1097, 1109, 1112,

1194

Totevision 1070, 1071

Touch 1016

Towada 1008, 1029

Towika 1008, 1029

TVA 1030

Uher 1031

UltimateTV 1019

Ultravox 1009

Unitech 1070

United Quick Star

1009, 1025

Universum 1026, 1028, 1031

Vector Research 1064

Video Concepts 1064

Videon 1024

Videosonic 1070

Viewsonic 1016

Voodoo 1016

Wards 1068, 1069, 1070,

1071

Weltblick 1031

XR-1000 1068, 1069

Yamaha 1064, 1065

Yamishi 1008, 1029

Yokan 1008, 1029

Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030,

1031

Zenith 1114

ZT Group 1016

DVD

4Kus 2051

Accurian 2142

Advent 2155, 2251

AEG 2362

Airis 2364

Aiwa 2322

Akai 2145, 2177, 2179,

2248

Akura 2356

Alba 2064, 2165, 2186,

2337, 2346

Alco 2149

Alize 2361

Allegro 2133

Amitech 2362

Amphion MediaWorks

2195

AMW 2195, 2363

Apex 2030, 2124, 2125,

2126, 2127, 2130,

2131

Apple 2241

Arrgo 2138

Asono 2364

Aspire 2152, 2222

Astar 2240

ATACOM 2364

Audiovox 2061, 2149

Avious 2367

Awa 2 36 3

Axion 2249

Bang & Olufsen 2128

Baze 2367

BBK 2364

Bellagio 2363

Best Buy 2359

Blaupunkt 2131

Blue Parade 2157

Boghe 2382

Brainwave 2362

Brandt 2148, 2188

Broksonic 2145, 2146

Bush 2064, 2110, 2170,

2268, 2290, 2346,

2358, 2367, 2383

California Audio Labs

2151

Cambridge Audio

2354

CAT 2352, 2353

CAVS 2192

Centrum 2353

CGV 2354, 2362

Changhong 2140

Cinetec 2363

CineVision 2133, 2237

Clatronic 2358, 2367

Coby 2031, 2046, 2360

Conia 2383

Continental Edison

2363

Crown 2362

C-Tech 2355

Curtis Mathes 2139

CVG 2377

CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138,

2187, 2336

Cytron 2244

Daenyx 2363

Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276,

2298, 2330, 2362,

2363, 2377

Daewoo International

2363

Dalton 2357

Dansai 2362, 2381

Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363

Dayton 2363

DEC 2358

Decca 2362

Denon 2059, 2151, 2193,

2332

Denver 2356, 2358, 2360,

2370

Denzel 2380

Desay 2205

Diamond 2354, 2355

DiamondVision 2225, 2232

Disney 2010, 2028

DK Digital 2339

Dmtech 2176

Dual 2380

Durabrand 2136

DVX 2355

Easy Home 2359

Eclipse 2354

E-Dem 2364

Electrohome 2362

Elin 2362

Elta 2341, 2361, 2362

Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150

Enterprise 2129

Enzer 2380

Epson 2247

ESA 2137

Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367

Fintec 2377

Fisher 2134

Funai 2137

Gateway 2051

GE 2029, 2131, 2156

Gericom 2351

GFM 2226

Giec 2382

Global Solutions 2355

Global Sphere 2355

Go Video 2133, 2213

Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291,

2358, 2371, 2376,

2382

GPX 2227

Gradiente 2151

Graetz 2380

Greenhill 2131

Grundig 2349

Grunkel 2362, 2366

GVG 2377

H&B 2358

H_her 2364

Haaz 2354, 2355

Haier 2254

Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135

HiMAX 2359

Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115,

2274, 2282, 2316,

2359, 2380

Hiteker 2130

Home Tech Industries

2364

Hyundai 2366

Ilo 2245

Initial 2131, 2245

Innovation 2182

Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253

Integra 2157

Irradio 2053

iSymphony 2246

JBL 2135

JVC 2020, 2096, 2097,

2099, 2100, 2101,

2102, 2103, 2106,

2107, 2160, 2257,

2260, 2262, 2263,

2321, 2324, 2326,

2327, 2343, 2464,

2465, 2468, 2469,

2471

Jwin 2198

Kansai 2360

Kawasaki 2149

Kennex 2362

Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348

KeyPlug 2362

Kiiro 2362

Kingavon 2358

Kiss 2380

KLH 2131, 2149

Koda 2358

Koss 2013, 2148, 2158

KXD 2359

Landel 2143

Lasonic 2132

Lawson 2355

Lecson 2381

Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367

Lenoxx 2136, 2153

LG 2002, 2033, 2038,

2057, 2129, 2133,

2189, 2191, 2223,

2238, 2270, 2288,

2335, 2373, 2375

Life 2182

Lifetec 2182

Limit 2355

Liquid Video 2158

Liteon 2043, 2051, 2142

Loewe 2320

LogicLab 2355

Magnavox 2025, 2050, 2137,

2150, 2159, 2224,

2230, 2358

Magnex 2367

Majestic 2360

Marantz 2328

Marquant 2362

Matsui 2148, 2378

McIntosh 2199

Mecotek 2362

Medion 2182

Memorex 2028, 2145, 2234

MiCO 2354, 2382

Micromaxx 2182

Microsoft 2156

Microstar 2182

Minoka 2362

Minowa 2367

Mintek 2131, 2245

Mitsubishi 2003

Mizuda 2358, 2359

Monyka 2380

Mustek 2186

Mx Onda 2354

Mystral 2366

Naiko 2362

Nesa 2131

Neufunk 2380

Nevir 2362

Next Base 2143

Nexxtech 2243

NU-TEC 2383

Onkyo 2159, 2368

Oopla 2051

Oppo 2196, 2255

Optim 2381

Optimus 2180

Orava 2358

Orbit 2363

Orion 2073, 2110

Oritron 2148, 2158

P&B 2358

Pacific 2355

Panasonic 2011, 2024, 2034,

2042, 2058, 2062,

2066, 2067, 2093,

2116, 2117, 2118,

2119, 2120, 2121,

2122, 2123, 2151,

2159, 2164, 2166,

2167, 2172, 2173,

2175, 2209, 2214,

2275, 2277, 2278,

2281, 2282, 2283,

2301, 2374, 2470

Parasound 2197

peeKTON 2364

Philips 2008, 2012, 2025,

2044, 2050, 2051,

2053, 2060, 2072,

2108, 2111, 2147,

2159, 2163, 2169,

2174, 2181, 2185,

2230, 2261, 2266,

2267, 2286, 2287,

2289, 2295, 2300,

2302, 2317, 2328,

2338, 2342, 2350,

2467

Phonotrend 2367

Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018,

2019, 2035, 2092,

2094, 2095, 2109,

2157, 2180, 2190,

2212, 2269, 2272,

2299, 2304, 2305,

2306, 2307, 2308,

- 6 -

2309, 2310, 2311,

2344, 2345, 2347,

2379

Pointer 2362

Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235

Portland 2362

Powerpoint 2363

Prima 2252

Proceed 2130

Proscan 2156

Prosonic 2360, 2377

Protron 2202

Provision 2358

Pye 2144

Qwestar 2148

Raite 2380

RCA 2021, 2029, 2104,

2105, 2131, 2149,

2156, 2157, 2229

RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362

Regent 2153

Reoc 2355

Rimax 2361

Rio 2133

Roadstar 2331, 2358

Ronin 2363

Rotel 2203

Rowa 2154, 2383

Rownsonic 2353

Saba 2148, 2188

Sabaki 2355

Saivod 2362

Sampo 2141

Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077,

2112, 2113, 2114,

2115, 2151, 2200,

2216, 2219, 2228,

2264, 2265, 2271,

2279, 2294, 2303,

2329, 2365

Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354,

2355, 2362

Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217,

2292

ScanMagic 2186

Schaub Lorenz 2362

Schneider 2176

Scientific Labs 2355

Scott 2161, 2357

Seeltech 2364

SEG 2162, 2355, 2363,

2380

Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088,

2091, 2182, 2194,

2220, 2221, 2231,

2236, 2293, 2340

Shinsonic 2245

Sigmatek 2359, 2364

Silva 2356

Singer 2354, 2355

Skymaster 2325, 2355

Skyworth 2356

Slim Art 2362

SM Electronic 2355

Sonic Blue 2133

Sontech 2366

Sony 2004, 2005, 2007,

2009, 2014, 2015,

2023, 2026, 2027,

2052, 2068, 2069,

2070, 2071, 2074,

2075, 2084, 2085,

2087, 2168, 2171,

2208, 2210, 2211,

2258, 2273, 2284,

2285, 2312, 2313,

2314, 2315, 2318,

2319, 2466

Soundmaster 2355

Soundmax 2355

Spectra 2363

Spectroniq 2201

Standard 2355

Star Cluster 2355

Starmedia 2358, 2364

Sungale 2204

Sunkai 2362

Superscan 2150

Supervision 2355

Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150,

2178, 2230, 2239

Symphonic 2108, 2230

Synn 2355

T.D.E. Systems 2366

Tatung 2001, 2362

TCM 2182, 2297

Teac 2149, 2333, 2355,

2383

Tec 2356

Technics 2151

Technika 2362, 2367

Telefunken 2353

Tensai 2362

Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357

Theta Digital 2157

Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334,

2372

Tokai 2356, 2380

Top Suxess 2364

Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037,

2039, 2048, 2049,

2054, 2055, 2072,

2073, 2076, 2078,

2079, 2086, 2145,

2159, 2218, 2233,

2256, 2259, 2296,

2369

TRANScontinents

2363, 2367

Transonic 2367

Trio 2362

Trutech 2242

TruVision 2359

TSM 2364

Umax 2361

United 2367

Urban Concepts 2159

US Logic 2245

Venturer 2149

Viewmaster 2364

Vocopro 2206

VocoStar 2207

Waitec 2364

Welltech 2382

Westinghouse 2063, 2250

Wharfedale 2354, 2355

Woxter 2361, 2364

Xbox 2156, 2183

Xlogic 2355, 2362

XMS 2362

Xoro 2382

Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363

Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065,

2080, 2081, 2082,

2083, 2089, 2118,

2151, 2323

Yamakawa 2363, 2380

Yukai 2186

Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133,

2159, 2223

Blu-ray Disc

LG 2033

Panasonic 2011, 2209, 2214

Pioneer 2212

Samsung 2045, 2113

Sharp 2194, 2220, 2221

Sony 2075

Yamaha 2064

DVR

Bush 2110

Hitachi 2090

Panasonic 2066, 2067, 2093,

2116, 2117, 2119,

2120, 2122, 2123

Philips 2108, 2111

Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018,

2019, 2092, 2094,

2095, 2109

RCA 2105

Samsung 2113, 2219

Sharp 2088, 2091

Sony 2084, 2085, 2087

Toshiba 2086

Yamaha 2089, 2118

DVD Recorder

Aspire 2222

Astar 2240

Broksonic 2146

Go Video 2213

Hitachi 2062

Insignia 2002

Irradio 2053

JVC 2100, 2101, 2106,

2107

LG 2033, 2057, 2223,

2238

Liteon 2043

Panasonic 2011, 2034, 2058,

2062, 2116, 2117,

2119, 2120, 2121,

2123

Philips 2008, 2044, 2050,

2051, 2147

Pioneer 2017, 2035

Pye 2144

Samsung 2000, 2112, 2216

Sansui 2073

Sanyo 2217

Sony 2004, 2005, 2007,

2052, 2068, 2069,

2074, 2208, 2210,

2211

Sylvania 2239

Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037,

2039, 2049, 2054,

2055, 2076

Yamaha 2056

Cable

ABC 3002, 3003, 3017,

3066, 3067, 3086,

3093, 3119, 3122

ADB 3020

Adelphia 3081

Alcatel 3016

Americast 3124

Amstrad 3022, 3098

Antronix 3065, 3070

Archer 3070

Arcon 3098

AT&T 3095

Axis 3098

Bell South 3124

Cable Vision 3092

Cabletenna 3065

Cabletime 3104

Cableview 3087

Clearmaster 3127

ClearMax 3127

Clyde Cablevision

3105

Colour Voice 3068

Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117

Comcrypt 3107

Comtronics 3069

Contec 3074

Coolmax 3127

COX 3084

Cryptovision 3110

Director 3084

Eastern 3075

Everquest 3123

Fidelity 3098

Filmnet 3107

Filmnet Cablecrypt

3111

Filmnet Comcrypt

3111

Finlux 3097

Focus 3126

Foxtel 3022

France Telecom 3100, 3101

Freebox 3023

GC Electronics 3070

GE 3066, 3093

GEC 3105

Gemini 3072, 3123

General Instrument

3017, 3025, 3066,

3084, 3090, 3096,

3117

Goldstar 3120

Gooding 3099

Grundig 3098, 3099

Hamlin 3073, 3078

Hirschmann 3097

Hitachi 3066

HomeChoice 3106

Humax 3021, 3080, 3083

ITT Nokia 3097

Jasco 3123

Jerrold 3017, 3018, 3025,

3066, 3072, 3084,

3090, 3096, 3119,

3123

JVC 3099

Kabel Deutschland

3024, 3027, 3121

Macab 3101

Magnavox 3079

Maspro 3099

Matsui 3099

MegaCable 3117

Memorex 3076, 3122

Minerva 3099

Mnet 3107

Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084,

3088, 3090, 3095,

3117

Movie Time 3077, 3109

Mr Zapp 3101

Multichoice 3107

Multitech 3127

NEC 3064

NET Brazil 3085

Nokia 3097

Noos 3101

NSC 3077

Oak 3074

Pace 3006, 3089, 3121

Palladium 3099

Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122

Paragon 3122

Philips 3068, 3071, 3079,

3099, 3100, 3101,

3103

Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094,

3098, 3114, 3116,

3120

Popular Mechanics

3126

Proscan 3066, 3093

Pulsar 3122

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix

3018

Quasar 3122

RadioShack 3123, 3127

RCA 3030, 3031, 3087,

3118

Realistic 3070

Recoton 3126

Regal 3078

Regency 3075

Rembrandt 3066

Runco 3122

Sagem 3101

Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114,

3120

SAT 3098

Scientific Atlanta

3000, 3001, 3002,

3003, 3006, 3028,

3029, 3081, 3086,

3089, 3094, 3095,

3108

Signal 3072, 3123

Signature 3066

Sony 3092, 3125

Sprucer 3118

Standard Component

3115

Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119,

3123

Stargate 3072, 3123

Starquest 3072, 3123

Supercable 3090

Supermax 3127

Tele+1 3107, 3111

Telepiu 3107

Thomson 3082, 3091

TIME WARNER

3084

- 7 -

Tocom 3067

Torx 3017

Toshiba 3122

Tristar 3127

Tudi 3102

Tusa 3072, 3123

TV86 3077

Unika 3065, 3070

United Cable 3018, 3119

Universal 3065, 3070

Universum 3097, 3099

V2 3127

Videoway 3019

View Star 3074, 3077, 3079

Viewmaster 3127

Vision 3127

Visiopass 3097, 3100, 3101

Vortex View 3127

Wittenberg 3098

Zenith 3113, 3122, 3124

Zentek 3126

Satellite

AB Sat 4216, 4217

AccessHD 4104

ADB 4220

AGS 4216

Akai 4053, 4055

Alba 4001, 4004, 4006,

4007, 4062, 4217

Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010

Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055

Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024

Alltech 4217

Alpha 4053

Alpha Digital 4104

Alphastar 4077

Amitronica 4217

Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217,

4218

Anglo 4217

Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024,

4217

Anttron 4001, 4004

Apollo 4001

Armstrong 4011, 4053

Artec 4100

Asat 4053, 4055

ASLF 4217

Astacom 4216

Astra 4009, 4011, 4054,

4217, 4219

Astro 4004, 4008, 4010,

4015, 4024, 4213,

4218, 4219

AudioTon 4004, 4048

Aurora 4222

Austar 4222

Axiel 4216

Axis 4008, 4009, 4024,

4050

Best 4008, 4024

Blaupunkt 4015

Blue Sky 4217

Boca 4011, 4054, 4059,

4217

Boston 4216

Brain Wave 4013

Broadcast 4012

Broco 4217

BSkyB 4035, 4041

BT 4216

Bubu Sat 4217

Bush 4006, 4045

Cambridge 4218

Canal Satellite 4213

Canal+ 4213

CaptiveWorks 4099

Channel Master 4007, 4110

Chaparral 4075

CHEROKEE 4216

Chess 4212, 4217

CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219

Clatronic 4013

CNT 4010

Comag 4080, 4081, 4082,

4083, 4086

Commlink 4005

Comtech 4050

Condor 4008, 4024, 4219

Connexions 4014, 4024

Conrad 4024, 4215, 4218,

4219

Conrad Electronic

4217, 4219

Contec 4050

Coolsat 4096

Cosat 4048

Coship 4109

Crown 4011

Daeryung 4014

Daewoo 4057, 4217

DDC 4007

Delega 4007

Dew 4050

Diamond 4051

Digiality 4219

Digital Stream 4105

DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067,

4068, 4070, 4071,

4074, 4107, 4116,

4119, 4121, 4122,

4123, 4127, 4192,

4193, 4194, 4195,

4196, 4197, 4198,

4199, 4200, 4201,

4202, 4203, 4206,

4207, 4221

Discoverer 4212

Discovery 4216

Diseqc 4216

Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089,

4092, 4094, 4095,

4117

Dishpro 4018, 4117

Distrisat 4053

Ditristrad 4048

DNT 4014, 4053, 4055

Drake 4072

DStv 4222

Dune 4024

Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065,

4089, 4117, 4217

Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011,

4217, 4218

Elap 4216, 4217

Elekta 4010

Elsat 4217

Elta 4001, 4008, 4024,

4048, 4053, 4055

Emanon 4001

Emme Esse 4008, 4024

Engel 4217

Ep Sat 4006

EURIEULT 4031

Eurodec 4052

Europa 4053, 4218, 4219

Europhon 4219

Eurosat 4011

Eurosky 4024, 4011, 4008,

4215, 4218, 4219

Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219

Eutelsat 4217

Exator 4001, 4004

Expressvu 4117

Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217

Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214

Fidelity 4218

Finlandia 4006

Finlux 4006

FinnSat 4050, 4052

Flair Mate 4217

Foxtel 4222

Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218

FTEmaximal 4024, 4217

Fuba 4024, 4001, 4008,

4014, 4015, 4055,

4215

Galaxis 4024, 4005, 4008,

4009, 4050, 4048,

4215, 4222

GE 4093, 4066, 4111,

4197

General Instrument

4073, 4019

GMI 4011

GOI 4117

Goldbox 4213

GoldStar 4049

Goodmans 4029, 4002, 4006

Goodmind 4111

Grandin 4031

Grothusen 4001, 4049

Grundig 4006, 4004, 4015,

4035, 4211, 4218,

4222

Hänsel & Gretel 4219

Hantor 4001, 4013

Hanuri 4010

Hauppauge 4044

Heliocom 4219

Helium 4219

Hinari 4007

Hirschmann 4024, 4015, 4210,

4218, 4219, 4216

Hisawa 4013

Hisense 4016

Hitachi 4114, 4006, 4199,

4203

Homecast 4087, 4084, 4085

Houston 4048

HTS 4117

Hughes 4064, 4068, 4194,

4192, 4196, 4202

Hughes Network Systems

4071

Humax 4097, 4025, 4030,

4060

Huth 4005, 4011, 4012,

4013, 4050, 4048,

4219, 4223

Hypson 4031

Ilo 4016

Imex 4031

Innovation 4008

Insignia 4107

Intertronic 4011

Intervision 4048, 4219

ITT Nokia 4006

Jerrold 4019

Johansson 4013

JOK 4216

JSR 4048

JVC 4089, 4065, 4117,

4029

Kamm 4217

Kathrein 4015, 4055, 4053,

4063, 4034, 4042,

4215, 4216, 4217

Kathrein Eurostar

4215

Klap 4216

Konig 4219

Kosmos 4049

KR 4004

Kreiselmeyer 4015

K-SAT 4217

Kyostar 4001

L&S Electronic 4024

Lasat 4024, 4010, 4008,

4054, 4215, 4212,

4219

Lasonic 4108

Lenco 4024, 4001, 4049,

4215, 4219, 4217

Leng 4013

Lennox 4048

Lenson 4218

Lexus 4053

LG 4103, 4107, 4049

Lifesat 4024, 4008, 4212,

4217

Lifetec 4008

Lorenzen 4219

Lorraine 4049

Lupus 4024, 4008

Luxor 4218

Lyonnaise 4052

Macab 4052

Magnavox 4127, 4101

Manata 4031, 4216, 4217

Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048,

4216

Marantz 4055

Mascom 4010

Maspro 4006, 4217

Matsui 4216

Max 4219

Mediabox 4213

Mediamarkt 4011

Mediasat 4009, 4213, 4218

Medion 4024, 4008, 4217

Medison 4217

Mega 4055, 4053

Memorex 4127

Metronic 4031, 4028, 4001,

4004, 4005, 4010,

4217

Metz 4015

Micro electronic 4218, 4219, 4217

Micro Technology

4217

MicroGem 4106

Micromaxx 4024, 4008

Microstar 4008

Microtec 4217

Minerva 4015

Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202

Mitsumi 4054

Morgan's 4011, 4054, 4055,

4053, 4217

Motorola 4090, 4091, 4088,

4019

Multichoice 4222

Multitec 4212

Muratto 4049

Mysat 4217

Navex 4013

Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4218,

4219, 4217

Neusat 4217

Next Level 4019

NextWave 4223

Nikko 4011, 4217

Nokia 4006, 4040

Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007,

4010, 4052

Nova 4222

Novis 4013

Oceanic 4051

Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050

Okano 4011

Optex 4048

Optus 4213, 4222, 4223

Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213,

4218

OSat 4004

Otto Versand 4015

Pace 4006, 4015, 4035,

4043, 4047, 4216

Pacific 4051

Packsat 4216

Palcom 4007

Palladium 4011, 4218

Palsat 4212, 4218

Panasat 4222

Panasonic 4121, 4126, 4124,

4006, 4035, 4036,

4221, 4198

Panda 4006, 4219

Pansat 4125

Patriot 4216

Paysat 4127

PCT 4110

Philco 4101

Philips 4071, 4068, 4127,

4006, 4055, 4053,

4061, 4033, 4213,

4216, 4196, 4202,

4203, 4201, 4206

Phoenix 4050

Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048

Pioneer 4046, 4213

Polsat 4052

Predki 4013

Premiere 4048, 4213

Priesner 4011

Primestar 4076

Profile 4216

Promax 4006

Prosat 4007, 4005

Proscan 4093, 4066, 4122,

4197

Protek 4051

Proton 4016

Provision 4010

- 8 -

Quadral 4024, 4007, 4005,

4008, 4216

Quelle 4015, 4215, 4219

Quiero 4052

RadioShack 4019

Radiola 4055, 4053

Radix 4014, 4037

Rainbow 4004

RCA 4093, 4066, 4112,

4113, 4118, 4119,

4116, 4122, 4197,

4207

Realistic 4078

Redpoint 4009

Redstar 4024, 4008

RFT 4005, 4055, 4053

Roadstar 4217

Roch 4031

Rover 4024, 4217

Saba 4010, 4215, 4219,

4216

Sabre 4006

Sagem 4023, 4052

Sakura 4050

Samsung 4064, 4071, 4069,

4123, 4120, 4003,

4000, 4001, 4032,

4196, 4200

SAT 4007, 4218

Sat Cruiser 4223

Sat Partner 4001, 4004, 4010,

4013, 4049, 4218

Sat Team 4217

Satcom 4012, 4219

Satec 4217

Satelco 4024

Satford 4012

Satmaster 4012

Satplus 4212

Schneider 4008, 4212, 4216

Schwaiger 4051, 4212, 4219

SCS 4215

Seemann 4011, 4009, 4014

SEG 4024, 4001, 4008,

4013

Seleco 4048

Servi Sat 4031, 4217

Siemens 4015

Silva 4049

Skantin 4217

Skardin 4009

Skinsat 4218

SKR 4217

Skymaster 4017, 4022, 4005,

4212, 4217

Skymax 4055, 4053

SkySat 4212, 4218, 4219,

4217

Skyvision 4048

SM Electronic 4212, 4217

Smart 4215, 4217

Sony 4067, 4070, 4213

SR 4011, 4054

Star Choice 4019

Starland 4217

Starring 4013

Start Trak 4001

Strong 4024, 4001, 4004,

4008, 4049, 4222

STS 4115

STVI 4031

Sumida 4011

Sunny Sound 4024

Sunsat 4217

Sunstar 4024, 4011, 4054

Supermax 4223

Tandberg 4052

Tandy 4004

Tantec 4006

TCM 4008

Techniland 4012

TechniSat 4021, 4026, 4027,

4014, 4053, 4038,

4039, 4212, 4213,

4218

Technology 4222

Technosat 4223

Technowelt 4219

Teco 4011, 4054

Telanor 4007

Telasat 4215, 4219

Telecom 4217

Telefunken 4017, 4001, 4216

Teleka 4004, 4011, 4014,

4218, 4219

Telemaster 4010

Telesat 4219

Telestar 4212, 4213, 4218

Televes 4006, 4218

Telewire 4048

Tempo 4223

Tevion 4008, 4217

Thomson 4020, 4006, 4052,

4058, 4208, 4215,

4213, 4219, 4216,

4217

Thorens 4051

Thorn 4006

Tivax 4104

Tivo 4196

Tokai 40 53

Tonna 4006, 4012, 4048,

4218, 4217

Toshiba 4194, 4202, 4203

Triad 4049

Triasat 4218

Triax 4015, 4215, 4218,

4217

Turnsat 4217

Tvonics 4214

Twinner 4031, 4217

UEC 4222

Uher 4212

UltimateTV 4070

Uniden 4079, 4127

Unisat 4011, 4050, 4053

Unitor 4013

Universum 4015, 4215, 4219

US Digital 4016

Variosat 4015

Vega 4024

Ventana 4055, 4053

Viewsat 4098

Visiosat 4013, 4048, 4216,

4217

Voom 4019

Vortec 4001

Welltech 4212

WeTeKom 4212, 4218

Wevasat 4006

Wewa 4006

Winersat 4013

Wisi 4006, 4014, 4015,

4218, 4219

Woorisat 4010

Worldsat 4216

Xrypton 4024

XSat 4217

Zehnder 4024, 4010, 4008,

4209, 4215

Zenith 4102, 4107, 4195

Zodiac 4004

Yamaha 5082, 5095

CD Recorder

Yamaha 5083

Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086

Tape

Yamaha 5084, 5087

Tuner

Yamaha 5066, 5071, 5085,

5088, 5090, 5092,

5094

Yamaha 5091, 5093

SIRIUS

Yamaha 5064, 5067

DOCK

Yamaha 5068, 5089

NET

Yamaha 5076, 5079

Yamaha 2080

Amplifier

Yamaha 5019, 5020

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual AV Receiver English CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ................................................... 3 About this manual............................................................. 4 Supplied accessories......................................................... 4 Part names and functions.................................................. 5 Front panel........................................................................ 5 Rear panel......................................................................... 6 Front panel display ........................................................... 7 Remote control ................................................................. 8 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers .......................................................... 9 Speaker channels and functions........................................ 9 Speaker layout ................................................................ 10 Connecting speakers and subwoofer .............................. 11 Connecting external components.................................... 14 Cable plugs and jacks ..................................................... 14 Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 15 Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 18 Connecting video cameras and portable audio players .. 22 Transmitting input A/V to external components ............ 22 Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 23 Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) .............................................................................. 24 PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure ............................................... 29 Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 29 Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) ............................................................ 30 Registering input sources/sound field program .............. 30 Enjoying sound field programs....................................... 30 Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders...... 30 Sound field programs ..................................................... 33 FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 35 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 35 Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ... 36 Recalling a preset station................................................ 38 Clearing preset stations .................................................. 38 Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) ..................................... 38 Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 40 Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ................. 40 Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 40 Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components....... 43 Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ........................................................................... 43 Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 43 Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 44 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) .................................................................. 45 Option menu display and setup ...................................... 45 Option menu items ......................................................... 45 Setting various functions (Setup menu)......................... 49 Setup menu display and settings .................................... 49 Setup menu items ........................................................... 50 Manages settings for speakers........................................ 50 Setting the audio output function of this unit................. 54 Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 55 Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 58 Setting the sound field program ..................................... 59 Prohibiting setting changes ............................................ 59 Setting sound field program parameters ....................... 60 CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 61 Parameters usable in certain sound field programs ........ 61 Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 62 Controlling other components with the remote control ............................................................................... 63 Keys connecting external components ........................... 63 Default remote control code settings.............................. 63 Registering remote control codes for external component operations .................................................... 64 Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 65 Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ................................ 66 Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu............... 66 Setting the impedance of speakers (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................. 66 Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers ............................................. 66 High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .................................................................... 67 Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits .......... 67 Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only)..................................... 67 Initializing various settings for this unit ........................ 67 Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 68 APPENDIX Troubleshooting ............................................................... 71 General ........................................................................... 71 HDMI™ ......................................................................... 74 Tuner (FM/AM) ............................................................. 74 iPod™/iPhone™ ............................................................ 75 Bluetooth™ .................................................................... 76 Remote control............................................................... 76 Glossary ............................................................................ 77 Audio information.......................................................... 77 Sound field program information................................... 78 Video information .......................................................... 78 Information on HDMI™................................................. 79 About trademarks ........................................................... 79 Specifications.................................................................... 80 Index ................................................................................. 82 En 2 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier ■ 1-button input/sound field program switching (SCENE function) .......................30 ■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations – – – – – – (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Speaker impedance configuration.....................................................12 Speaker channels and functions .................................................................................................................9 Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................10 Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................11 Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................13 High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .....................................................................13 ■ Acoustic parameter adjustment to match your speakers and listening environment – Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters (YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer).......................................................................24 – Specifying the settings for each speaker..................................................................................................50 – Volume control for each speaker..............................................................................................................52 – Speaker distance settings .........................................................................................................................52 – Sound quality control with the equalizer <Graphic Equalizer> ..............................................................52 – Test tone speaker adjustment ...................................................................................................................53 – Bass and treble level adjustment <Tone Control> ...................................................................................29 ■ External component connection (max. 14 inputs) and playback – – – – – – – – – – External component connection...............................................................................................................15 Audio signal output from the TV transmitted through the HDMI jack ...................................................57 HDMI/AV video input combining other audio input...............................................................................47 Correction of lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync>...............................................................54 Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................4 Input source name changing <Input Rename> ........................................................................................58 Configuring the settings specific for each input source <Option menu> ................................................45 Playback from external components........................................................................................................29 Playback from an iPod/iPhone (iPod/iPhone and components sold separately) .....................................40 Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................43 ■ HDMI settings – – – – – Setting the HDMI functions.....................................................................................................................55 Controlling this unit from HDMI compatible device such as TVs <HDMI Control function> ..............68 Listening to TV audio with single HDMI cable connection <Audio Return Channel function>............70 Changing HDMI video output up-scaling resolution ..............................................................................57 Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits ....................................................................................67 ■ FM/AM tuner – – – – – – FM/AM broadcast listening .....................................................................................................................35 Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................36 (U.K. and Europe models) Radio Data System tuning ............................................................................38 (U.K. and Europe models) Automatic traffic information reception.......................................................39 Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural)...................................................................................................36 (Asia and General models only) Changing FM/AM frequency steps initializing various settings for this unit...............................................................................................................................................35 ■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback – – – – – – – Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................30 Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................31 Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................31 Sound field effect configuration ..............................................................................................................60 Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................30 Setting the decode format of digital audio signals <Decoder Mode> .....................................................46 Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method <Extended Surround> .............................................46 ■ Front panel information display/OSD (On-Screen Display) on the TV screen – – – – Front panel display information switching ................................................................................................7 Front panel display brightness adjustment <Dimmer>............................................................................59 Adjusting the position of the on-screen display <OSD Shift> ................................................................59 Digital video/audio signal information display <Signal Info> ................................................................47 ■ Volume adjustment functions – – – – Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................54 Maximum volume settings.......................................................................................................................55 Startup volume settings............................................................................................................................55 Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................46 ■ Remote control operation – External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................63 – Multiple Yamaha receiver operation without signal interference <Remote ID Switching>....................66 ■ Other features – – – – – Standby mode after prolonged non-operation <Auto Power Down function>........................................59 Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>...................................................................8 To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> .........................42 Initializing various settings for this unit ..................................................................................................67 Prohibiting setting changes of this unit <Memory Guard> .....................................................................59 En 3 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities About this manual • Some features are not available in certain regions. • This manual is created prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the remote control. Refer to the “Part names and functions” (☞p. 5) for the information about each position of the parts. • J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. • Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the corresponding page in “Part names and functions.” Front panel Rear panel Front panel display Remote control Supplied accessories ■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied) ■ Installing batteries in the remote control To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the cover, push the left section of it. When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+ and -). a Battery compartment cover c b Attach the cover Battery compartment Replace the batteries with new ones if the following symptoms become evident: • The remote control can only be operated within a narrow range. • bTRANSMIT does not light up, or only lights dimly. PUSH NOTE Check that you received all of the following parts. • • • • • • Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2 YPAO microphone AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna VIDEO AUX input cover Remove the cover If there are remote control codes for external components registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur, replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes. En 4 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions e MEMORY Front panel f a A (Power) Switches this unit between on and standby mode. g b HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby mode. • When Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV during the standby mode (☞p. 56). J1 • When an iPod is charging in the Yamaha iPod universal dock during the standby mode (☞p. 42). When the HDMI Control functions are “On” (☞p. 56), then this stays on during standby mode. h i j k l c YPAO MIC jack d Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance automatically (☞p. 24). INFO Changes the information displayed on the front panel display (☞p. 7). a b c m n SCENE Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 37). J2 PRESET j / i Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 38). J2 FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM (☞p. 35). J2 AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM (☞p. 35). J2 TUNING jj / ii Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 35). J2 Front panel display Displays information on this unit (☞p. 7). DIRECT Switches this unit to direct mode (☞p. 32). PHONES jack For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback can also be heard through the headphones. INPUT l / h Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. d e f g h i o p q r s j Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single button (☞p. 30). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on. TONE CONTROL Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones (☞p. 29). PROGRAM l / h Switches between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are using and the surround sound decoder (☞p. 30). Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. STRAIGHT Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 31). VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting video cameras, game consoles, and portable music players to this unit temporarily. Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack. VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. k YPAO MIC DIRECT INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO SILENT CINEMA l VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT PORTABLE m n o p q VIDEO L AUDIO R r s J 1 : During the standby mode, you can select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) to output to a TV. When the input is changed correctly, HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator blinks twice. J 2 : Usable when you have selected tuner input. En 5 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions Rear panel e AV OUT jacks a DOCK jack f b c d For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 40, ☞p. 43). HDMI OUT jack For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video signals (☞p. 16). HDMI1-4 jacks For connecting external components equipped with HDMIcompatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 18). AV1-6 jacks For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 19, p. 20). g h j SPEAKERS terminals For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV36 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞p. 22). ANTENNA jacks For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 23). AUDIO1-2 jacks For connecting to external components equipped with analog audio outputs to input sound into this unit (☞p. 21). MONITOR OUT jacks VIDEO jack COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For connecting a TV capable of receiving video input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 16). For connecting TV that are compatible with component video signals, using three cables to output video signal (☞p. 16). k l m For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers (☞p. 12). SUBWOOFER jack For connecting a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (☞p. 13). VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Select the switch position according to your local voltage (Refer to Quick Reference Guide). Power cable For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet. i AUDIO OUT jacks For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞p. 22). a b c (Ex: U.K. and Europe models) Distinguishing the input and output jacks The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or other external component. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 HDMI 3 SPEAKERS HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SINGLE GND AM PR PR Output jacks S VIDEO 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y ARC MONITOR OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 HDMI 3 SPEAKERS HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SINGL GND AM PR DEO 75ǡ PB VIDEO Y OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT AUDIO 2 PRE OUT 5 d e fg h i j k l AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT SUBWOOFER PRE OUT m En 6 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions Front panel display g Cursor indicators a HDMI indicator h b c d e f Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the HDMI 1-4 inputs are selected. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP technology is selected. Tuner indicator Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast. SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞p. 8). MUTE indicator Flashes when audio is muted. VOLUME indicator Displays the current volume level. i ■ Changing the front panel display Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. Multi information display Displays a range of information on menu items and settings. Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. The front panel can display sound field programs and surround decoder names as well as the active input source. Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source → sound field program → surround decoder in order. J2 Input source name Subwoofer Front speaker L Surround speaker L a Surround back speaker L SW C Center speaker L R SL SR SBL SB SBR HDMI1 Front speaker R VOL. Straight Surround speaker R Surround back speaker R SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Sound field program (DSP program) Surround back speaker J1 b c d SLEEP STEREO TUNED e f VOL. MUTE SW C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR g h g i J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only. J 2 : While selecting a tuner input, the FM/AM frequency is displayed instead of the input source. En 7 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions a Remote control signal transmitter Remote control Transmits infrared signals. b TRANSMIT Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. a c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power) b c Switches an external component on and off. CODE SET TRANSMIT n SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP p HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 o 1 d 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK e FM AM PRESET f INFO TUNING TUNER MEMORY g MUSIC DIRECT SCENE h BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO q OPTION i VOLUME ENTER j RETURN POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE s Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM. Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes tuning frequencies. f INFO Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name of the currently selected input source, the sound field program, the surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.)(☞p. 7). g Sound selection keys REC k l r DISPLAY FM AM MEMORY PRESET F / G TUNING H / I Switch between the sound field effect (sound field program) you are using and the surround decoder (☞p. 30). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT TV VOL l Numeric keys Enter numbers. m TV control keys Operate a monitor such as a TV. n CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (☞p. 63, p. 67). o RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power) Switches this unit between on and standby mode. Switch this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. The SLEEP indicator (☞p. 7) lights up when the sleep timer is on. q OPTION Displays the Option menu for each input source (☞p. 45). r VOLUME +/Adjusts the volume level (☞p. 29). s MUTE Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 29). h SCENE Switches the input source and the sound field program with a single button (☞p. 30). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on. i SETUP TV m ENT Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external components. J1 p SLEEP Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner input. STEREO STRAIGHT HDMI1-4 jacks AV1-6 jacks AUDIO1-2 jacks Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks Changes the external component to operate with the kExternal component operation keys without changing inputs. J1 A Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK jack. FM/AM tuner e Tuner keys ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE Select an input source on this unit from which to playback. DOCK TUNER Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when setting menus, etc, are displayed. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen when setting menus are displayed, or ends the menu display. k External component operation keys d Input selector HDMI1-4 AV1-6 AUDIO1-2 V-AUX [A]/[B] AV j Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN TV CH Displays a detailed Setup menu for this unit (☞p. 49). MUTE J 1 : You can use kExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input in advance if you want to operate external components (☞p. 63). En 8 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and connections in your listening environment. Speaker channels and functions ■ Surround left and right speakers ■ Front left and right speakers The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/ 7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and left rear-area is output. The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Surround back speaker setting: When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position. Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum. When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the listening position. ■ Subwoofer Ex. Ex. Front speaker layout: Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. ■ Center speaker The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Surround speaker layout: Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor. The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier. ■ Surround back left and right speakers Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right surround speakers. Ex. Subwoofer speaker layout: Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall. Ex. Center speaker layout: Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. Ex. En 9 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Speaker layout ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer) ■ 6.1-channel speaker layout (6 speakers + subwoofer) ■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer) Front speaker R Front speaker R Front speaker R Subwoofer Front speaker L Front speaker L Subwoofer Surround speaker R 60q 60q Center speaker Surround back speaker L Subwoofer Surround speaker R 80q Center speaker 80q Surround speaker L Front speaker L 60q 80q 60q 80q Surround speaker R Center speaker 60q 60q 80q 80q 30 cm (12 in) or more Surround speaker L Surround back speaker Surround speaker L Surround back speaker R • Connect at least two speakers (front left and right). • If you cannot connect all five speakers, give priority to the surround speakers. • The surround speakers should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position. • When used with 7.1-channel speaker layout, arrange the left and right surround back speakers at least 30 cm a part. ■ CRT monitors We recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers to avoid video distortion, especially for the front and center speakers near the screen. If your screen still gets interference from magnetically shielded speakers, move the speakers farther away from your TV. En 10 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Connecting speakers and subwoofer Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel. CAUTION • Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. • Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “-” (negative, black) terminal. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on. ■ 7.1-channel speaker connection (7 speakers + subwoofer) Front speaker R ■ 6.1-channel speaker connection (6 speakers + subwoofer) Surround speaker L R Surround back speaker L R Front speaker R Surround speaker L L R SPEAKERS HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND ■ 5.1-channel speaker connection (5 speakers + subwoofer) Surround back speaker Center speaker R Surround speaker L L R SPEAKERS HDMI 3 SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Subwoofer L SPEAKERS HDMI 3 SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SINGLE AUDIO OUT Front speaker HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SINGLE AUDIO OUT Center speaker SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Subwoofer SINGLE AUDIO OUT Center speaker SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Subwoofer En 11 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changing speaker impedance This unit is configured for 8Ω speakers as the factory setting. When connecting to 6Ω speakers, carry out the following procedure to switch to 6Ω. 1 2 4 5 Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. Connecting the banana plug (Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. The power turns on, when the settings you made has been configured. Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. 2 FR ON T Banana plug ■ Connecting speakers Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. J1 3 FR ON T 1 4 PROGRAM l / h A Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.” YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires of the cables together firmly so that they will not cause short circuits. 2 3 4 Loosen the speaker terminals. STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel. SPIMP.-8MIN Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap on the side of the terminal. Tighten the terminal. J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 66) for details on the Advanced Setup menu. En 12 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Connecting the subwoofer ■ Bi-amp connection for front speakers This unit can connect speakers that support bi-amp connections. When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks and the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram below. To activate a bi-amp connection, connect the power cable, and then set the following. 1 2 Check that the unit power is in standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. J1 A 1 Connect the subwoofer input jack to the SUBWOOFER jack on this unit with an audio pin cable. FRONT STRAIGHT SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE 2 Set the subwoofer volume as follows. BD DVD PHONES Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than half). Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN MAX Subwoofer examples INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA NOTES • Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • If connecting a bi-amp, then surround back speakers cannot be used. PROGRAM l / h 3 Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to switch to the following display. BI-AMP-OFF 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to change the settings to “ON.” Switch this unit to standby mode, and then switch it on again. The bi-amp connection becomes effective and the unit is powered on. To deactive a bi-amp connection, follow the same procedure and select “OFF” in step 4. J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 66) for details on the Advanced Setup menu. En 13 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Cable plugs and jacks S VIDEO jack (U.K. and Europe models only) This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are going to connect. ■ Audio/Video jacks VIDEO jack This jack transmits conventional analog video To transmit S-video signals that include luminance signals. (Y) and chrominance (C) components. Use video pin cables. Use S-video cable. S-video cable Video pin cable HDMI jacks Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack. Only use an HDMI cable. HDMI cable • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. ■ Audio jacks OPTICAL jacks COAXIAL jacks These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio signals. These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. Digital audio fiber-optic cable ■ Analog video jacks Digital audio pin cable COMPONENT VIDEO jacks The signal is separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use component video pin cables with three plugs. Component video pin cable AUDIO jacks PORTABLE jack These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals. Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L jack. This jack transmits conventional analog audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable when connecting. Stereo pin cable Stereo mini-plug cable En 14 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Connecting a TV monitor When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV. HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input signal format supported by your TV. Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output to the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit. J1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks HDMI OUT jack (MONITOR OUT) Input Output HDMI HDMI TV HDMI input COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM VIDEO GND AM PR 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y HDM COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR HDMI 2 Through Y MONITOR OUT Converted When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV VIDEO jack (MONITOR OUT) Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using for playback. Input Output HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO TV Component video input S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Video input Through J 1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio used when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 55). En 15 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor ■ Connecting a video monitor J1 Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack. Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack. HDMI ARC ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 HDMI input COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR HDMI 75ǡ PB (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 ANTENNA PB HDMI PR VIDEO 75ǡ V PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Video input GND AM PR PB VIDEO VIDEO HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR HDMI OUT DOCK Y Y Y MONITOR OUT MONITO TV OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 V AUDIO 2 OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 TV AUDIO 2 • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. ■ Connecting a component video monitor J1 Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks. Component video input COMPONENT VIDEO ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM GND AM PR 75ǡ PB PR PR PB PR HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y Y R OUT TV OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 J 1 : When connecting to a TV that supports HDMI input, the video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO jacks is converted and output from HDMI OUT jack. When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these jacks. En 16 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Listening to TV audio To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV: When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI Control function When your TV supports both HDMI Control (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the unit are possible using a single HDMI cable. The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that makes TV sound control easier to use. For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 70). When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (Ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV. For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 69). When using other TVs To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect its AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio output jacks. Depending on the connection on TV, connect the TV’s audio output to the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2. TV audio output Connection Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a digital audio pin cable. Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a fiber-optic cable. Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, or V-AUX with a stereo pin cable. Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound. If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output to the receiver’s AV4 jack. Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation using the SCENE function (☞p. 30). Available input jacks Audio output (Optical) ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR OPTICAL O 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT TV O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control code (☞p. 63). En 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 d This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on the playback devices such as BD/DVD players. AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK Input jack TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING Video input Audio input HDMI1 HDMI HDMI HDMI2 HDMI HDMI HDMI3 HDMI HDMI ■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from other input jacks. For example, if an playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack, use the following method to change the audio input. ARC HDMI/Audio (Optical) output ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT HDMI4 HDMI HDMI AV1 Component video Optical digital HDMI BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE ENT j AV2 Component video Coaxial digital AV3 Video Coaxial digital AV4 Video Optical digital AV5 Video Analog (Stereo) AV6 Video Analog (Stereo) AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo) AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo) VIDEO AUX Video Analog (Stereo) HDMI 2 COMPONENT HDMI VIDEO GND AM PR 75ǡ PB HDMI SETUP HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM PR DIRECT SCENE (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y OPTICAL MONITOR OUT O O OPTICAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player 1 2 3 4 ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with HDMI Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-4 jacks. Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-4) that the playback device is connected to for playback. d Input selector j Cursor C / D / E j ENTER q OPTION COAXIAL Use the dInput selector to select the desired HDMI input source. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1 Press jCursor C repeatedly to select “Audio In,” and then press jENTER. Press jCursor D / E to select the audio input source. When the video input source from this unit is selected on TV, the menu items are displayed on the TV screen (On-Screen Display). ARC HDMI OUT DOCK ANTENNA HDMI VIDEO FM HDMI output HDMI1OPTION FRONT COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR AudioIn;;;;;;AV1 PR 75ǡ PB PB If you have selected AV1 input audio (optical digital) VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT HDMI 5 HDMI OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 Once you have completed the setup, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. AUDIO OUT J 1 : When operating the Option menu, information is displayed both on the TV screen (On-Screen Display) BD/DVD player and on the front panel. Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 45) for details on the Option menu. En 18 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component cables Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks. ■ Component connections to analog audio output devices Component video / Audio output Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV1 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. COMPONENT VIDEO ARC PR PB AUDIO ARC COMPONENT HDMI 1 ANTENNA PR PR PB PB Y Y HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM Y (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Component video / Audio (Optical) output GND AM PR 75ǡ PB VIDEO VIDEO (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR L Y MONITOR OUT ANTENNA PR HDMI 2 R L GND AM PR PR R PB PB 75ǡ PB Y PB Y OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL Game console O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV2 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. Component video / Audio (Coaxial) output AUDIO 2 You can use the video input from the AV1-2 jacks in combination with the audio input from other AV inputs or AUDIO1-2. When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 18) for detailed setup guidance. Select the AV input source (AV1-2) that is connected by component video cable to the playback device for playback. When the video input source from this unit is selected on TV, the menu items are displayed on the TV display (On-Screen Display). ARC COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA PR FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO P PR R PR PB 75ǡ P PB B Y PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y AV1OPTION AudioIn;;;AUDIO1 GND AM If you have selected AUDIO1 input audio (Analog stereo) Y MONITOR OUT COAXIAL C C OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player En 19 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with S-video cables (U.K. and Europe models only) Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV3 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. Connect the S-video cable to the AV5 input jack. Connect the output audio to the AV5 analog audio jack. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA Video / Audio (Coaxial) output ARC HDMI 1 ANTENNA S-video / Audio output FM S HDMI 2 PR PR 75ǡ PB VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR GND AM (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PB VIDEO VIDEO GND AM V PR VIDEO V Y Y MONITOR OUT S 75ǡ PB COAXIAL PB VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO Y C Y C MONITOR OUT L OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) L AV OUT (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 R R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player Using analog stereo audio output sources BD/DVD player Select the AV5 or AV6 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. Select the AV5 input source for connected video output that the playback device is connected to for playback. Video from the S VIDEO jack is output through the HDMI OUT jack only. ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks. ARC Video / Audio output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR VIDEO Using optical digital audio output sources V Select the AV4 input that the playback device is connected to for playback. 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO V Y Y MONITOR OUT L L R R ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA Video / Audio (Optical) output COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 GND AM PR PR 75ǡ PB VIDEO BD/DVD player PB VIDEO VIDEO V COAXIAL AV 1 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM OPTICAL HDMI 2 V Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL (CD) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player En 20 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices Using coaxial digital output sources Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) that the playback device is connected to for playback. Using analog stereo output sources Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) that the playback device is connected to for playback. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM FM PR COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR Audio (Coaxial) output PR 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y 75ǡ PB GND AM PR HDMI 2 HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Audio output HDMI 1 ANTENNA ARC DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Y PB MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO Y C COAXIAL Y L C MONITOR OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) AV 1 OPTICAL (TV) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 R OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) (TV) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV OUT AV 6 CD player CD player Using optical digital output sources Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) that the playback device is connected to for playback. We recommend connecting audio devices with an coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD” SCENE key (☞p. 30). ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR PR 75ǡ PB Audio (Optical) output PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL (CD) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 CD player En 21 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Connecting video cameras and portable audio players Transmitting input A/V to external components Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect video cameras, video game units, or portable audio devices to the receiver. Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices. This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components. Video / Audio input RADIO VIDEO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT V PORTABLE VIDEO V L L AUDIO R AUDIO R L AUDIO AUDIO OUT R ARC L (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA Audio output Audio output FM R HDMI 4 FRONT PR 75ǡ PB V Video output HDMI 3 GND AM PR VIDEO HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PB VIDEO VIDEO V Y VCR Y MONITOR OUT L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 R OPTICAL AV 5 Audio input L AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT AUDIO L R Portable audio player Video cameras • Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices. • When external components are connected to both the PORTABLE jack and the AUDIO jacks, the sound output from the PORTABLE jack is transmitted. Audio recorder Using the AV OUT jacks Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks. Using the AUDIO OUT jacks Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks. HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, S-video signals and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted from these jacks. En 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM/AM antennas An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas properly to their respective jacks. AM loop antenna Position the AM antenna away from the receiver. The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the GND jack. Indoor FM antenna (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA NENT O FM HDMI 2 HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR 75ǡ ■ Improving FM reception We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized dealer. ■ Improving AM reception Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5-10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop antenna is still connected. Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground. The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet. PB VIDEO VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT Connecting the AM loop antenna Press and hold Insert Release Assembling the AM loop antenna En 23 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) This unit is equipped with a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings for which specialist knowledge is usually needed, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1 When you use YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers for approximately 3 minutes and acoustic measuring will be performed. When using YPAO, be careful of the following. • Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if present) is set to maximum. VOLUME • The test tone is output at high volume. Please refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others nearby. • Please take care that the test tone does not frighten any small children. MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 3 4 Switch this unit on. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. MAX Subwoofer examples YPAO MIC You can view the operations of YPAO on the front panel display or on the OSD (On-Screen Display) displayed on your TV while you use it. This explanation uses references to the OSD display on your TV. 2 INFO Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position. Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards. YPAO microphone 1 Check the following before using YPAO. “MIC ON. View OSD MENU” appears on the front panel display, and the following appears on the TV screen. J2 This unit • The headphones are removed. AutoSetup TV • This unit is connected to the TV correctly. • The power is turned on. • The video input to which the video output from this unit has been selected. Subwoofer • The power is turned on. EQ Type;;;;Natural .Start When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod) as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod screws to fix the microphone in place. [OPTION]:EQ Select [SETUP]:Start Continues to the next page J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance. J 2 : To cancel measurement, disconnect the YPAO microphone. En 24 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 5 HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK FM AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET 6 Press iSETUP to start measurement. Display during measurement During YPAO, the results of measuring the acoustic characteristics are used to set the equalizer (parametric equalizer) to give a unified sound field. After setting, you can select the characteristics of the sound field in “EQ Type,” as necessary. TUNER INFO If necessary, press qOPTION repeatedly and select the measuring acoustic characteristics in the “EQ Type” setting. J1 TUNING AutoSetup ;Initializing .;PreCheck ;MainCheck ;Calculation ;Level CheckCH=FrontL ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;02% []:Exit ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO DIRECT Natural (Default) Adjusts all speaker sound to give natural acoustics. BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION Flat Sets uniform characteristics for each speaker. Choose this when all of the speakers used are of the same quality. If the treble range sounds harsh after adjustment, select “Natural” and measure again. q VOLUME ENTER RETURN i j DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Front TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / D / E j ENTER q OPTION The following display appears when measurement finishes without any problems. Press jENTER to apply the results of measurement. AUTOSETUPFinished Disconnect Microphone AutoSetup PRESS[ENTER] [SETUP]:Exit RESULT SP:3/4/0.1 DIST:2.50/3.00m LVL:-1.0/+1.5dB .>SetCancel Sets the characteristics of each speaker to match the front speakers. Choose this when the front speakers are of significantly higher quality than the other speakers. [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Finish If you want to carry out measurement again, press jCursor E to select “Cancel” and press jENTER. After this operation, use the same procedure to carry out YPAO again. SP ENT TV INPUT 7 AutoSetup SCENE SETUP When a problem occurs, an error message or report appears either during or after measurement. Use the following page as a reference to solve the problem, and carry out YPAO again. p STRAIGHT NOTE This completes preparations. To achieve more accurate results, be careful of the following when measuring. • Measuring will take approximately 3 minutes. Keep the room as quiet as possible during measurement. • Wait in the corner of the listening room during measurement or leave it entirely, to avoid becoming an obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO microphone. Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround Back/Subwoofer 8 Remove the YPAO microphone. YPAO finishes automatically when the YPAO microphone is removed. DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance LVL Displays the speaker output levels in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you have finished measuring, store the microphone out of direct sunlight, and away from locations that may experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV equipment. J 1 : You can also select “EQ Type” using the cursor keys. Press jCursor B to select “EQ Type,” and you can change the setting using jCursor D / E. En 25 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ When an error message appears RECEIVER SLEEP during measurement HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 Check the content of the message from the “Error message” (☞p. 27) to resolve the problem, and carry out the measurement process again. AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM ERROR AM PRESET INFO .E-9:USER CANCEL Don'toperate anyfunction >RetryExit TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT [ BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO Check the error code that appears in the display, and carry out YPAO again by performing the following steps. OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE j Cursor C / D / E j ENTER When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-4” or “E-6” is displayed: MUTE REC TV j ENT 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Check that the environment is suitable for accurate measurement. ■ When a warning message appears after measurement Check the content of the message from the “Warning message” (☞p. 28) to resolve the problem. You can confirm the speaker that has the problem on the TV screen. Number of messages Press jCursor C once to select “Retry.” AutoSetup .WARNING(1) RESULT SP:3/4/0.1 DIST:2.50/3.00m LVL:-1.0/+1.5dB >SetCancel Press jENTER to carry out YPAO again. [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Return SCENE When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is displayed: Press jCursor C once, and then press jCursor E to select “Exit.” Press jENTER to finish YPAO, and switch the unit to standby mode. Check that the speakers are properly connected. Turn on the unit, and then carry out YPAO again. [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Finish When “E-10” is displayed: 1 2 3 4 Press jCursor C once to select “Exit.” Press jENTER to finish YPAO. Switch the unit to standby mode. NOTE Although you can apply the results of measurement when a warning message appears, doing so will not provide optimal sound. We recommend you resolve the problem and then carry out YPAO again. Confirm the warning message: Press jENTER once. WARNING Turn on the unit again, and then carry out YPAO. W-3:LEVELERROR ------- ---SR SBLSBR SWFR:TOO LOUD [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker that has a problem When multiple warning messages exist: Use jCursor D / E to display other warning messages. When applying the results of measurement: If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Set,” and press jENTER. When cancelling YPAO: If an warning message is displayed, press jENTER to switch display, use jCursor D / E to select “Cancel,” and press jENTER. En 26 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Message list ■ Error message NOTE If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have occurred and carry out the measurement process again. ■ When a warning message appears before measurement Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is not connected. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! The headphones are connected. Remove the headphones. Memory Guard! The settings of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” in the Setup menu to “Off” (☞p. 59). E-1: NO FRONT SP E-2: NO SUR. SP E-4: SBR.SBL E-5: NOISY E-6: CHECK SUR. The unit was not able to find the front channel. Check that the left and right front speakers are connected correctly. The unit was only able to find one of side of the surround channels. Check that the left and right surround speakers are connected correctly. Only one surround back speaker is connected and only the right side surround back channel sound is detected. When only one surround back speaker is connected, connect to the left side (SINGLE) terminal. The noise is too loud, preventing accurate measurements from being taken. Measure again in quiet surroundings. Turn off any devices in the room that may be emitting noise, or place them further away from the YPAO microphone. When this message is displayed, selecting “Proceed” will allow you to continue measuring. However, we recommend resolving the problem and measuring again, as continuing measurement without doing so will not give accurate results. Even though surround left and right speakers are not connected, only the surround back speakers are connected. E-7: NO MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. While measuring, take care not to touch the YPAO microphone. E-8: NO SIGNAL The YPAO microphone could not distinguish a test tone. Check that the YPAO microphone has been installed correctly. Check that each speaker has been connected and installed correctly. The YPAO microphone or the YPAO MIC jack may be broken. Inquire at the retailer where you purchased this unit, or the nearest Yamaha service center. E-9: USER CANCEL You have carried out an operation that has cancelled the measuring process. Carry out the measuring process again. Do not operate this unit by, for example, adjusting the volume. E-10: INTERNAL ERROR An internal error has occurred. Carry out the measuring process again. Contact a Yamaha service center if “E-10” appears again. When using surround back speakers, connection of the surround left/right speakers is necessary. En 27 CONNECTIONS Set up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Warning message W-1: OUT OF PHASE The speakers displayed are connected with the opposite polarity. Depending on the type of speakers you are using and the environment in which you have them installed, this message may occur even if the speakers are connected correctly. Depending on the type of speakers, “W-1” may display even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2: OVER 24m (80ft) The speakers displayed are separated from the listening position by more than 24 m, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Install the speakers with 24 m of the listening point. W-3: LEVEL ERROR The difference each channel is too loud or too low, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Check that all speakers are installed in the same surroundings. Check that the speaker polarity + (positive), and - (negative) are correct. If these are connected correctly, you can use the speakers normally even this message appears. Check that the speaker polarity + (positive), and - (negative) are correct. We recommend the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible. Adjust the volume of the subwoofer. If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results, but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process again. En 28 PLAYBACK CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Basic playback procedure RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK d TUNER FM AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 2 Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Turn on this unit and select the input source using dInput selector. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. J1 TUNING Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output level in those frequency ranges. Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Adjustment increments 2.0 dB ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT 3 SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION ENTER RETURN Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. VOLUME r Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external component for details on playback. MUTE s For details on the following operations, refer to the corresponding pages: DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones connected. 1 The display returns to the previous display soon after you release the key. If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.” TONE CONTROL REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 • “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 35) • “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™” (☞p. 40) • “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components” (☞p. 43) ENT YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 4 Press rVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume. PHONES TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h To mute the output. d Input selector r VOLUME +/s MUTE INPUT Press sMUTE to mute the audio output. Press sMUTE again to unmute. The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. TONE Treble VOL. 0.0dB SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display as necessary (☞p. 58). En 29 PLAYBACK Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound field programs with one key. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY Four scenes are available for different uses, such as d playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. SCENE Input Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI1 Straight TV AV4 Straight CD AV3 Straight RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT g SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION 1 2 Use dInput selector to select the input source you want to register. Use the gSound selection keys to select the sound field program you want to register. 3 Press the hSCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. SCENE1 VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR SET Complete Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed When changing “SCENE,” also change the external component that the remote control operates (☞p. 63). VOLUME ENTER RETURN h Registering input sources/sound field program DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE d Input selector g Sound selection keys h SCENE Enjoying sound field programs This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel playback for almost any sound source using various sound field programs stored on the chip, and a range of sound decoders. Selecting sound field programs and sound decoders This unit offers sound field settings (sound field programs) in many different categories suitable for movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound field program that sounds best with the source you are playing back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of the program. • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you playback DTS Express sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞p. 31) is automatically selected. • When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. Continues to the next page En 30 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER (Straight decoding mode) Press gSTEREO repeatedly Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback sound without sound field processing. You can playback as follows in straight decoding mode. Selects compressed music enhancer: 2-channel sources such as CD Press gSTEREO repeatedly Stereo sound plays through the front left and right speakers. Selects stereo reproduction: AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly 4 AUDIO FM ■ Enjoying unprocessed playback Selects sound field program: TV CD SETUP Selects surround decoder: Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly RADIO Switches Direct mode (☞p. 32): OPTION Select “2ch Stereo” from the surround field programs when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front speakers only), regardless of the playback source. Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the playback of CD and BD/DVD sources. 2-channel sources such as CD Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/ DVD g Switches Straight decoding mode: Press gSTRAIGHT ■ Enjoying stereo playback Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers. Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD Plays back audio from a playback source without applying sound field effects, using an appropriate decoder to split the signal into multiple channels. Playback channels other than the front channels in the playback source are mixed with the front channels and played back through the front speakers. Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight decoding mode. Press gSTEREO repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo.” Press gDIRECT VOLUME ENTER Sound field program categories RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE MOVIE VOL. Sci-Fi REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 L SL SBL R SR SBR Program 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE STEREO VOL. SW C • You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel display to check what speakers are currently outputting sound (☞p. 7). • You can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters) for each of the programs. Straight L SL SBL SW C R SR SBR Sci-Fi SW 2ch Stereo L R To disable stereo playback, press any of the gSound selection keys to select a sound field program other than “2ch Stereo.” To disable straight decoding mode, press gSTRAIGHT again. MOVIE VOL. VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR MUSIC VOL. Hall in Vienna SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Previously selected program g Sound selection keys g MOVIE g MUSIC g STEREO g SUR. DECODE g STRAIGHT g DIRECT En 31 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Enjoying sound field programs RECEIVER SLEEP without surround sound speakers HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers only. This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically when surround speakers are unavailable. J1 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ■ Enjoying sound field programs with headphones Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA mode). J2 ■ Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality (Direct mode) Use Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. J3 ENT Press gDIRECT to turn direct mode on. J4 TV INPUT TV VOL g TV CH MUTE VOL. Direct g DIRECT L R To disable direct mode, press gDIRECT again. J 1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available in the following conditions: • When headphones are connected to this unit. • When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected. • When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. J 2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions: • When a “7ch Stereo” sound field program is selected. • When direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. J 3 : The following features are disabled in direct mode. • sound field program, tone control • display and operation of the Option menu and Setup menu J 4 : While direct mode is on, the front panel display screen becomes dim in order to reduce noise. When turning Direct mode off, the brightness of the screen returns to the previous setting. En 32 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs Sound field programs Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment that makes the listener feel as if they are right there by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. in the table indicates the sound field program for CINEMA DSP. ■ Category: MOVIE Sound field programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive sounds. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium. ■ Category: MUSIC This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs. Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. En 33 PLAYBACK Enjoying sound field programs ■ Category: STEREO Suitable for listening to stereo sources. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right speakers. 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. ■ Category: ENHNCR (Compressed music enhancer) Suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3. Straight Enhancer Use this program to restore the original depth and dynamics of 2-channel or multi-channel to compression audio. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to playback compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. ■ Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode) Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sound sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder. q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of sound sources. q PLIIx Movie / q PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for movies. J1 q PLIIx Music / q PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for music. J1 q PLIIx Game / q PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for games. J1 Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music. J 1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions: • When the “Sur. B” setting in “Speaker Setup” of the Setup menu is set to “None.” • When headphones are connected. En 34 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the best reception. AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK d TUNER e FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP (Asia and General models only) The factory pre-set FM/AM tuner frequency steps are 9 kHz for AM and 50 kHz for FM. Carry out the following settings and select the frequency steps suitable for your listening environment. RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 1 2 REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. J1 ENT STRAIGHT INPUT TV VOL Press PROGRAM h repeatedly to display “TU.” TU-AM9/FM50 4 5 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a frequency steps. TV CH MUTE YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM 1 2 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press eFM or eAM to select a band to receive. VOL. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The power turns on, with the settings you made configured. A TV 3 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning) FM87.50MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Continues to the next page The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. Normal tuning You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. Preset tuning (☞p. 36) You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. SCENE BD DVD d TUNER e FM e AM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA FM/AM tuner frequencies will differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. This explanation uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. PROGRAM l / h J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 66) for details on the Advanced Setup menu. En 35 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 3 HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AV AUDIO TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT Use eTUNING H / I to set a frequency to receive. eTUNING H Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station d on a higher frequency than the current one. J1 e eTUNING I Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station on a lower frequency than the current one. J1 SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q Lights up when receiving a broadcast from a station Lights up when receiving a stereo broadcast POP-UP MENU FM98.50MHz MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENT TV INPUT TV CH l Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. In normal tuning mode, use the lNumeric keys on the remote control to enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when entering a number. J2 For example, enter as follows to select a station on 98.50MHz. 4 FMMode:Mono The tuner detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 automatically. AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use manual station preset (☞p. 37). VOL. SBL SBR Press jENTER and use jCursor D / E to select “Mono.” 9850 You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations as preset stations. There are two methods of presetting stations, “Auto Preset” and “Manual Preset.” Use one of these methods to register stations. automatically (Auto Preset) Use jCursor B / C to select “FM Mode.” FMMode SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Registering and recalling a frequency (Preset tuning) ■ Presetting FM stations Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 OPTION VOL. ■ Entering a frequency number TV VOL 1 2 3 STEREO TUNED REC 10 When you are receiving an FM broadcast and cannot obtain a stable stereo broadcast, you can force this unit to receive in a monaural mode. STEREO TUNED j DISPLAY TOP MENU ■ When signal reception is poor VOL. SBL SBR 1 2 3 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 Use jCursor B / C to select “Auto Preset.” MUTE 9 8 5 5 When setting is completed, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. To return this unit to its original settings, use the same procedure and select “Stereo” in step 4. d TUNER e TUNING H / I j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER l Numeric keys q OPTION OPTION VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Auto Preset Continues to the next page J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has started. J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the frequency entered is correct. J 3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 45) for details on the Option menu. En 36 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 4 AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING AUDIO TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC e Press jENTER, then press ePRESET F / G or jCursor B / C to choose the present number from which to start the Auto Preset function. Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after you select a preset number. If you do not select a preset number, Auto Preset will begin approximately 5 seconds after “READY” is displayed. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT Selecting a preset number DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP Status RADIO OPTION RETURN READY VOLUME ENTER Frequency j SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE (Manual Preset) Select stations manually and register them as presets individually. 1 2 Tune in to the station you want to register, referring to “Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)” (☞p. 35). Use one of the following methods to register the station you are currently receiving. ■ Registering to a preset number to which no station is registered VOL. 01:FM87.50MHz ■ Registering stations manually Preset number Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer. The station will be registered automatically to the lowest open preset number (or the next number after the one registered most recently). REC MEMORY To cancel registration, press jRETURN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL ■ Designating a preset number for registration Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset number that the station has been registered to will appear. Preset number The newly registered frequency 9850 VOL. STEREO TUNED SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR 01:Empty Blinks Empty, or the frequency registered most previously Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register. To cancel registration, press jRETURN or do not operate the remote control for about 30 seconds. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR During Auto Preset ENT Search Preset for stations SEARCH MEMORY Registered frequencies TV CH MUTE e MEMORY e PRESET F / G j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN When Auto Preset is complete FINISH Auto Preset VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR The Option menu closes automatically when presetting is complete. J1 J 1 : The preset with the lowest preset number will be selected automatically immediately after presetting. En 37 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Recalling a preset station RECEIVER SLEEP Clearing preset stations Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. J1 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING To select a registered station, press ePRESET d F / G to select the preset number of the station. J2 e ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RETURN POP-UP MENU Use jCursor B / C to display “Clear Preset” and press jENTER. CLEAR j Blinks VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Registered frequencies Press jRETURN to cancel the operation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 l ENT 4 TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE ■ Displaying the Radio Data System You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time.” MUTE REC Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text,” “Clock Time” when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. information 01:FM98.50MHz DISPLAY TOP MENU Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J3 q VOLUME ENTER Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. The number of the preset to be cleared RADIO OPTION 1 2 3 Use jCursor B / C to select the preset number you want to clear, and press jENTER to clear it. 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend that you use the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (☞p. 36). Continues to the next page Repeat this operation to clear the registration of multiple numbers. d TUNER e PRESET F / G j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN l Numeric keys q OPTION 5 J 1 : Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped. “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed when there are no stations are registered. Press qOPTION to finish this operation. J 2 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the lNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you J 3 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 45) for details on the Option menu. want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.” appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered the correct number. En 38 PLAYBACK FM/AM tuning CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AV Press fINFO repeatedly until the desired information is displayed. Frequency Information on the display changes as you press the key. The kind of information is displayed for a while and then the information is displayed. J1 AUDIO ProgramService FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET ProgramType VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR READY VOL. TrafficProgram RadioText Program Type SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR f (Frequency display) ClockTime STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT AudioDecoder DSPProgram SCENE TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION POP-UP MENU j Type of information Program Service DISPLAY TOP MENU Contents of information are as follows. q VOLUME ENTER MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV CH d TUNER f INFO j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Displays the name of the Radio Data System program service currently being received. Displays the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. Radio Text Displays the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. Clock Time Displays the current time. DSP Program Displays the currently selected sound field program. ENT TV MUTE Description Program Type INPUT TV VOL Press jENTER to start the search function. STEREO TUNED CLASSICS TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE RETURN 4 Status 10800 d TUNER BD DVD Front panel display (When “Program Type” selected) Audio Decoder “Program Service,” “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Type” do not appear when the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. ■ Automatic traffic information reception (U.K. and Europe models only) When the tuner is active, this unit can automatically search for and receive transmissions from traffic information broadcast stations. To start this function: 1 2 Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. When a traffic station is found, it will appear on the display and the Option menu will close. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J2 OPTION 3 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Type, Radio Text, or Clock Time is displayed. That shows this unit is receiving data (or stopping receiving data). If the data is receivable, the corresponding information is displayed after a while. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Traffic information broadcast station (Frequency) VOL. TrafficProgram J 1 : “PTY Wait,” “RT Wait,” or “CT Wait” may appear when Program VOL. STEREO TUNED If the receiver cannot find a traffic station, “TP Not Found” will appear on the display, and the Option menu will shortly close. Use jCursor B / C to select “TrafficProgram.” OPTION FINISH TPFM101.30MHz VOL. VolumeTrim Displays the currently selected surround decoder. • The transmission search will begin in approximately 5 seconds. Or, when the status indicator reads “READY,” you can begin the search immediately by pressing jENTER. • By pressing jRETURN right before or during a search, it will return to the Option menu. • When the status is “READY,” use jCursor B / C to start a search in the specified direction. jCursor B: Searches upward from the current frequency. jCursor C: Searches downward from the current frequency. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR J 2 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 45) for details on the Option menu. En 39 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound field programs (☞p. 34) to give compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC d • • • • iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS are supported (As of March 2010). When connecting an iPhone, please use a YDS-12. Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone. Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the dock. The unit is now ready for playback. DOCK VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR iPodconnected CAUTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode before connecting an iPod universal dock. DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB 9 0 10 VIDEO ENT Y TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/ iPhone. The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two ways. Simple play mode: Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Menu browse mode: Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed on the TV. MUTE OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (CD) d DOCK Yamaha iPod universal dock En 40 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Playing only iPod/iPhone audio RECEIVER SLEEP through the unit (Simple play mode) HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK Use the following remote control keys to operate (playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone. You can d check song information on the iPod/iPhone screen. J1 TUNER FM dDOCK AM PRESET INFO f MEMORY jCursor B / C Move the cursor up and down to different fields. jCursor D / E Return to the previous menu or enter the menu you have selected. jENTER Enter the selected menu. kDISPLAY Switches between simple play mode or menu browse mode. kw Searches backwards while held down. kf Searches forwards while held down. kb Skip to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips one song backwards with each press. ka Skip to the beginning of the next song. ks Stops playback. ke Switches between playback and pause. kp Switches between playback and pause. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU j k MUTE REC k 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Switch to the DOCK (iPod) input. TUNING TV CH MUTE d DOCK f INFO j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER k DISPLAY ks ke kp kw kf kb ka ■ Playing iPod/iPhone viewing the menu displayed on the TV (Menu browse mode) 4 Operate the iPod/iPhone using the unit’s remote control, while looking at the menu displayed on the TV. • Information on the iPod/iPhone can only be displayed in alphanumeric characters. “_” (underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display. • When displaying play information in menu browse mode, song information (Artist, Album, Song) is displayed on the front panel. Change the displayed information by pressing fINFO repeatedly. • (Except iPod touch and iPhone) In menu browse mode, the “Yamaha Mark” will be displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. You cannot directly control your iPod/iPhone while this mark is displayed. 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press kDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode. Select iPod/iPhone menu items using jCursor B / C / D / E, and press jENTER to play. The following screen appears on the display during playback. iPod[Play][ 1/9 All a b c d e f g h i a b c d FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia e f |||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 g h i Track number/total tracks Artist name Album title Song title Progress bar Elapsed time Shuffle and repeat icons iPod/iPhone status (playback, pausing, search forward, search backward) Remaining time Press kDISPLAY again to return to simple play mode. 3 Press jCursor B / C to select the content (music or video) that you want to play, and press jCursor E. J2 J 1 : Controls on the iPod/iPhone can also be operated in simple playback mode. J 2 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing video files. En 41 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Shuffle/Repeat playback RECEIVER SLEEP You can use special playback functions such as shuffle playback and repeat playback by first displaying the Option menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK d TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU j k MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 1 2 3 4 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press kDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. J1 Press jCursor B / C to select the desired playback function, “Shuffle” or “Repeat,” then press jENTER. Shuffle Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the shuffle function is enabled, “ ” appears on the TV screen. Off Does not play back songs or albums in random order. Songs Plays “Songs” back in random order. Albums Plays “Albums” back in random order. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Repeat Plays songs or albums repeatedly. d DOCK j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER k DISPLAY q OPTION Off Does not play back songs or albums repeatedly. One Plays a “Song” back repeatedly. All When all “Songs” have completed playback, returns to the start and repeats playback. When the repeat function is enabled, “ “ (All)” appears on the TV screen. 1 (One)” or All 5 6 7 Press jCursor D / E to select the desired playback function. To close the Option menu, press qOPTION. Play the iPod/iPhone. 1 2 3 Playback of the iPod/iPhone starts using the function selected in step 5. To disable Shuffle/Repeat playback, redo the above steps, and return settings to “Off.” ■ To charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode If you connect an iPod/iPhone to the iPod universal dock the iPod/iPhone will always charge when this unit is turned on. This unit can charge an iPod/iPhone even when in standby mode (iPod Standby Charge function). Check the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator on the front panel of this unit to check whether this unit is charging an iPod/iPhone during in standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the HDMI Through/ iPod Charge indicator lights. When Standby Through function is off, the indicator goes out after the charging is complete. Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. Use jCursor B / C to display “Standby Charge” and press jENTER. DOCKOPTION StandbyCharge AutoOff 4 5 Use jCursor D / E to switch the setting to “Off.” When setting is completed, press qOPTION to close the Option menu. To enable the Standby Charge function again, carry out this procedure again and change the “Standby Charge” setting back to “Auto.” If necessary, you can also disable the iPod Standby Charge function. J 1 : Refer to the “Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu)” (☞p. 45) for details on the Option menu. En 42 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible portable music players. J1 HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING NOTE d TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY e ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component. Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver Pairing Bluetooth™ components SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the q DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be j complete when this unit is turned on. Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted. Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth component as necessary when carrying out pairing. DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the device which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted. MUTE REC DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO 1 2 3 4 PR 5 6 7 8 PB 9 0 10 ENT Y 4 DOCK TV TV VOL TV CH MUTE OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (CD) d DOCK e MEMORY j Cursor B / C j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver CAUTION To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 1 2 3 Press qOPTION to display the Option menu and use jCursor B / C to select “Pairing.” OPTION Pairing SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR • To cancel pairing, press jRETURN. • You can also press and hold eMEMORY on the front panel to begin pairing. 5 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. VOL. Searching... VIDEO INPUT Press jENTER to start pairing. Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. When the device is recognized, it will appear in the Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10 YAMAHA.” 6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. J2 When pairing occurs correctly VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR DOCK VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Completed J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. J 2 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is displayed instead of “Completed.” En 43 PLAYBACK Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Using Bluetooth™ components RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET When pairing is complete, carry out the following procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless d connection is complete, you playback from Bluetooth components. Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established automatically or by operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is not necessary to carry out the following procedure. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 j 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press qOPTION to display the Option menu. 3 Use jCursor B / C to select “Connect” and press jENTER. J1 When wireless connection is complete DOCK BTconnected VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR “Not found” is displayed when there is an error connecting. Check that the following conditions have been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless connection again. • Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired. • The Bluetooth component is switched on. • The Bluetooth component is within 10 meters/32 feet of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 4 Operate the Bluetooth component for playback. To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.” ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE d DOCK j Cursor B / C j ENTER q OPTION J 1 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been connected. En 44 SETUP CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 4 This receiver has a unique option menu specific for each type of input source, such as volume trim for compatible input sources, audio/video data display for signals from playback devices, and other frequently used menu items. AV 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING AUDIO d Option menu display and setup TUNER FM You can view the operations of Option menu on the front panel display or on the OSD (On-Screen Display) displayed on your TV while you use it. This explanation uses references to the OSD display on your TV. AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT 4 Select the desired menu item (or enable a function) using jCursor B / C / D / E and jENTER. Parameters of the selected item are displayed. The parameters you can set differ depending on the menu items. Option menu items The following menu items are provided for each input source. HDMI1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Audio In Signal Info Volume Trim Decoder Mode Audio In Signal Info Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Auto Preset SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN q DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 1 Use the dInput selector on the remote control to select the Option menu you want to display. 2 Press qOPTION. j 5 Option menu 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 .VolumeTrim DecoderMode ExtendedSurround AudioIn SignalInfo TV INPUT TV VOL To close the Option menu, press qOPTION. HDMI1OPTION ENT TV CH AV1-2 AV3-4 The Option menu appears for the desired input source. REC 1 • You can also use jRETURN to return to the previous screen or close the Option menu. • Certain selected menu items may automatically close the Option menu when their functions are carried out. For a few seconds after closing the Option menu, the remote control keys may not function. If this occurs, reselect the input source. Extended Surround Signal Info AV5-6 Volume Trim AUDIO1-2 Volume Trim V-AUX Volume Trim TUNER Volume Trim FM Mode Clear Preset TrafficProgram J1 Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat Connect/ Disconnect Pairing MUTE d Input selector j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN q OPTION 3 [ p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Select Select the desired control/setup item using jCursor B / C and press jENTER. The displayed Option menu items differ depending on the input source. For details, read the following Option menu items section. iPod (DOCK) Bluetooth (DOCK) Standby Charge Volume Trim J 1 : U.K. and Europe models only. En 45 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Adjusting volume between input sources Volume Trim Input source: ■ Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method Extended Surround All Reduces any change in volume when switching between input sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You can adjust this parameter for each input source. Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB Default setting 0.0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB steps Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. Auto (Default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. q PLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when two surround back speakers are connected. q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-channel. Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. ■ Setting the format of digital audio signals Decoder Mode Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if the format is not automatically detected correctly even during playback of DTS format audio, this menu item can be used to set the playback format to DTS. Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match the format of the input audio. DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel” function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TV Audio In). En 46 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source video and audio Audio In Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-2 Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/ digital audio inputs in situations such as: – an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot transmit audio through HDMI – an playback device with component video output and analog audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the system • For details of settings, refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 18) and “Component connections to analog audio output devices” (☞p. 19). • To return audio inputs to their previous settings, display this item again, and select the original input jack. Assignable audio input jacks To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-4 or AV1-2) as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this menu. Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input jacks. Audio inputs Settings method Optical digital audio input Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected input. Coaxial digital audio input Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected input. Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2. Connect the external component audio cable to the audio jack for the selected input. Format of audio signals. Channel The number of input signal channels (front/surround/ LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. Sampling The sampling frequency of analog-to-digital conversion. Bitrate The bit rate of input signal per second. signals Signal Info HDMI1-4, AV1-4 J1 Displays information on digital audio and video signals on the TV screen. HDMI1OPTION AudioIn;;;;;;AV1 Format ■ Displaying information on audio/video Input source: Inputs that change the audio source Audio information Menu item HDMI1OPTION AUDIO FormatDolbyD Channel3/2/0.1 Sampling48kHz Bitrate384kbps VIDEO InHDMI1080p OutHDMI1080p Information Video information In Format and resolution of video input signal. Out Format and resolution of video output signal. Message (appears only when an error has occurred) Error messages about HDMI signals and components. Error message HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Device Over The number of connected HDMI components is over the limit. Out of Res. The connected monitor is not compatible with the video input signal. • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are being received, and “---” is displayed if this unit cannot recognize the incoming signal. • The bit rate may vary during playback. J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when the “Audio Return Channel” function is on, and the source is used for the TV audio input (TV Audio In). En 47 SETUP Configuring the settings specific for each input source (Option menu) ■ Changing FM mode (Stereo/Monaural) FM Mode Input source: ■ Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone Shuffle TUNER Sets this unit to automatically match FM broadcast frequencies in stereo, or to convert the frequency to monaural (☞p. 36). ■ Automatically presetting FM radio stations Auto Preset Input source: DOCK (iPod) Changes the shuffle playback style on iPod (☞p. 42). ■ Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone Repeat Input source: DOCK (iPod) Changes the repeat playback style on iPod (☞p. 42). Input source: TUNER Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency and registers them as preset stations (☞p. 36). ■ Clearing preset FM stations Clear Preset Input source: TUNER Clears the preset stations (☞p. 38). ■ Searching for traffic information (U.K. and Europe models only) TrafficProgram Input source: TUNER Automatically searches for traffic information with the Radio Data System (☞p. 39). ■ Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth component Connect Disconnect Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth) Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off (☞p. 44). ■ Pairing Bluetooth component Pairing Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth) Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 43). ■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby mode Standby Charge Input source: DOCK (iPod) Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock while the receiver is in standby mode (☞p. 42). En 48 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP You can configure various function settings of this unit using the Setup menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 Setup menu display and settings AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING You can view the operations of Setup menu on the front panel display or on the OSD (On-Screen Display) displayed on your TV while you use it. This explanation uses references to the OSD display on your TV. TUNER FM INFO AM MEMORY 2 ;SoundSetup .;Lipsync ;AdaptiveDRC ;DynamicRange ;MaxVolume ;Init.Volume ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE CD RADIO i Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. For a few seconds after closing the Setup menu, the remote control keys may not function. If this occurs, reselect the input source. []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter OPTION SetupMenu VOLUME ENTER RETURN .;SpeakerSetup ;SoundSetup ;HDMI Setup ;FunctionSetup ;DSPParameter ;MemoryGuard j DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC Ex: Sound Setup menu 3 2 3 ;Init.Volume 4 Setup menu categories 5 6 9 0 7 10 ENT Speaker Setup Set parameters for speakers, such as speaker status, and volume adjustment for each speaker. Sound Setup Set functions related to audio output, such as adjustment of maximum volume and of dynamic range. TV TV VOL Init.Volume;;;;;Off 8 INPUT TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN HDMI Setup Use jCursor B / C to navigate the submenus to find the desired setting and press jENTER. [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 1 6 [ TV Press iSETUP on the remote control. p BD DVD SETUP 1 Use the jCursor B / C to select the desired menu and press jENTER. Set functions related to HDMI, such as HDMI Control functions and video conversion settings (resolution and aspect ratio). Function Setup Sets functions such as changing input names and auto power down that make the unit easier to use. DSP Parameter Edit sound field programs. Memory Guard Protects settings against accidental alteration. [p]/[[]:Select [RETURN]:Return 4 5 When multiple menu item is displayed, use jCursor B / C to select the desired item. Use jCursor D / E to change the setting. You can return to the previous screen by pressing jRETURN. You can change other items by repeating step 4 and 5. En 49 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Setup menu items Manages settings for speakers ■ Manual speaker setup Config Setup menu ;SpeakerSetup Speaker Setup Config []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ (speakers) Level (unit and speakers) Distance Equalizer (speakers and frequency bands) Test Tone Sound Setup HDMI Auto Lipsync Auto Delay Adaptive DRC Manual Delay Dynamic.Range Max Volume Init.Volume HDMI Setup Control TV Audio In J1 AudioReturnChan J1 Standby Through J1 Audio Output J1 Resolution Aspect J2 Function Setup Input Rename AutoPowerDown Dimmer OSD Shift DSP Parameter .;Config ;Level ;Distance ;Equalizer ;TestTone p Subwoofer Front SP Center SP Sur. L/R SP Sur.B L/R SP Crossover Freq. Subwoofer Phase Extra Bass Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters. Some items in the “Config” submenu take up a full screen. To display other items press jCursor B / C. In the Config submenu, you can select the speaker size characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers. Speaker Setup submenu Config Manually manages speaker configuration, such as speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass audio processing. Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker. Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on distance to the listening point. Equalizer Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output characteristics. Test Tone Generates test tones. Woofer diameter • 16 cm or larger → Large • 16 cm or smaller → Small When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components of the speakers that you configured are produced from the subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer). Subwoofer Confirms the subwoofer. Yes (Default) Select this when you have a subwoofer connected. During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio from other channels. J3 None Select this when you do not have a subwoofer connected. The front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio from other channels. Memory Guard J 1 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting. J 2 : This menu item appears depending on the “Resolution” setting. J 3 : Enabling the “Extra Bass” setting allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to produce bass audio. En 50 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Front SP Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers. J1 Small (Default) Large Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components. J2 Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Center SP Selects the size of the center speakers. None Sur.B L/R SP Selects the size of the surround back speakers. None Select this when no surround back speakers are connected. SMLx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is connected. SMLx2 (Default) Select when two small surround back speakers are connected. LRGx1 Select when one large surround back speaker is connected. LRGx2 Select when two large surround back speakers are connected. Select this when there is no center speaker. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Sur. L/R SP Selects the size of the surround speakers. None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small. Large Select this when the surround speakers are large. • When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround back speaker even if that speaker is connected. • When set to “None,” the sound field programs will change to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. • When there are no surround speakers are inactive, the setting will automatically change to “None.” • You can set surround back audio signals, including from the playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right surround back speakers (5.1-channel layout). Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or unclear. Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Extra Bass Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer and the front speakers. On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. When the “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” the “Extra Bass” setting is disabled. Crossover Freq. Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component output from speakers set to “Small.” Audio with a frequency below that limit will be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J3 40Hz 110Hz 60Hz 120Hz 80Hz (Default) 160Hz 90Hz 200Hz 100Hz J 1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will automatically change to “Large.” J 2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Crossover Freq.” setting. J 3 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less). En 51 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Controlling the volume of each speaker Level ■ Manually setting speaker distance Distance Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use jCursor B / C to select the desired speaker and adjust the volume with jCursor D / E. ■ Adjusting sound quality with the equalizer Equalizer Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Selecting adjustment units FR.L Front speaker L FR.R Front speaker R CNTR Center speaker SUR.L Surround speaker L SUR.R Surround speaker R SBL Surround back L SBR Surround back R Unit Selects the distance unit (meters or feet). SB J1 Surround back Front L Front speaker L SWFR Subwoofer Front R Front speaker R Center Center speaker Use jCursor B / C to select “Unit,” and then use jCursor D / E to choose the units of length (meters or feet). Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric or graphic equalizer. EQ Type Select Select an equalizer type. Auto PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer to adjust sound quality. Selecting this setting applies the tone settings obtained using YPAO (☞p. 24). J2 The acoustic characteristics (EQ Type) selected when YPAO has been carried out is displayed under Auto PEQ. GEQ (Default) Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust sound quality. By pressing jENTER, you can adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Off Disables the equalizer. Setting distances for each speaker Use jCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to configure, and then use jCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker to your listening position. Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Sur. L Surround speaker L Default setting 0 dB (FR.L/FR.R/SWFR) -1.0 dB (CNTR/SL/SR/SBL/SBR/SB) Sur. R Surround speaker R Sur. B L Surround back speaker L Adjustment increments 0.5 dB Sur. B R Surround back speaker R Sur. B J1 Surround back speaker SWFR Subwoofer Adjustable range 0.30 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) Default setting 3.00 m (10.0 ft) (Front L/Front R/SWFR) 2.60 m (8.5 ft) (Center) 2.40 m (8.0 ft) (Sur. L/Sur. R/Sur.B L/Sur.B R/Sur.B) Adjustment increments 0.10 m (0.5 ft) J 1 : “SB” and “Sur.B” is displayed when using a 6.1 channel configuration only. J 2 : Using YPAO to carry out acoustic measurement selects “Auto PEQ” automatically. “Auto PEQ” does not appear if the measurement process has not been carried out at least once. En 52 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Generating test tones ■ Adjusting the graphic equalizer 1 2 When “EQ Type Select” is displayed, use jCursor D / E to select “GEQ” and press jENTER. Check that “Channel” selects and use jCursor D / E to select the speaker for which you want to adjust the equalizer. ;Equalizer .Channel;;;;FrontL 63Hz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB 160Hz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB 400Hz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB 1kHz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB 2.5kHz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB 6.3kHz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB 16kHz;;;;;;||;;;;;; 0dB [p]/[[]:Select Frequency band Speaker Setting the volume level for the selected frequency 3 Press jCursor C repeatedly to select the frequency you want to adjust, then use jCursor D / E to adjust the volume. Raising volume: Press jCursor E. Lowering volume: Press jCursor D. Frequency range 63 Hz/160 Hz/400 Hz/1 kHz/2.5 kHz/6.3 kHz/ 16 kHz Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0 dB to +6.0 dB Default setting 0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. Off (Default) Does not generate test tones. On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced constantly. You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal graphic equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished making adjustments. You can use jCursor B / C to select another frequency or return to step 2. Repeat steps 2-3 to adjust the tone to your liking. 4 When you have finished making adjustments, press iSETUP to close the Setup menu. En 53 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) .;Lipsync ;AdaptiveDRC ;DynamicRange ;MaxVolume ;Init.Volume Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function). HDMI Auto When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function. Off (Default) [ p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Sound Setup submenu On Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Adaptive DRC Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible. Dynamic Range Max Volume Init.Volume Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for Dolby Digital and DTS playback. Select this when the connected monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function or you do not want to use the automatic lipsync function. Set the correction time in “Manual Delay.” Select this when the monitor supports the automatic lipsync function. Fine-adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay.” Auto Delay Fine-adjust the audio output timing by entering the correction time provided when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.” Sets the maximum volume for this receiver. Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms ■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level (from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “Auto.” J1 Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. When the “Auto” is selected, it adjusts the dynamic range as follows. Auto Off Input Level Volume: low Output Level ;SoundSetup ■ Synchronizing audio/video output Output Level Setting the audio output function of this unit Auto Off Input Level Volume: high Manual Delay Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function or “HDMI Auto” is set to “Off.” Adjustable range 0 ms to 240 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms Default setting 0 ms J 1 : The Adaptive DRC setting is also effective when you use headphones. En 54 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS dynamic range Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. Min/Auto Setting HDMI functions Init.Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby mode. J1 Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Default setting Off Adjustment increments 0.5 dB .Control;;;;;;;;;On TV Audio In;;;;;AV4 AudioReturnChan;Off Resolution ;;;*Thrgh []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select [ Adjustable range ;HDMI Setup p (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. ■ Setting the startup volume HDMI Setup submenu STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use. Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off. Max (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. TV Audio In J2 Chooses automatically selected audio input in conjunction with TV operation when the HDMI Control is turned on. AudioReturnChan J2 Transmits audio/video output to the TV and audio input from the TV through a single HDMI cable. Standby Through J2 Selects whether HDMI audio/video signals will be continue to be produced when this unit is on standby. Audio Output J2 Selects the audio output device connected to this unit via HDMI jacks. Resolution Sets the resolution of video signals converted from analog to HDMI. Aspect J3 Sets the horizontal-to-vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of video signals converted from analog to HDMI. ■ Setting the maximum volume Max Volume Sets a maximum volume level so that the audio is not played too loudly. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume. Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB / +16.5 dB (Maximum volume) Default setting +16.5 dB Adjustment increments 5.0 dB J 1 : When you set the “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Init.Volume,” the “Max Volume” setting has priority. J 2 : This menu item appears depending on the “Control” setting. J 3 : This menu item appears depending on the “Resolution” setting. En 55 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control) Control Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those devices. Please refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 69) for instructions. Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.” On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1 If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate. ■ Selecting an input source to assign audio input for the TV TV Audio In Select the input source that matches operations carried out on the TV while the HDMI Control function is on. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source selected here. J2 AV1 to AV6 Assigns any of the AV1-6 input source for the audio input from the TV. AUDIO1/AUDIO2 Assigns AUDIO1 or AUDIO2 input source for the audio input from the TV. Default setting AV4 J 1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be transmitted to the TV. • “TV Audio In” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “On.” • Please refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 68) for setting instructions. • For details on inputting the audio signal from the TV, refer to “Listening to TV audio” (☞p. 17). ■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel) AudioReturnChan You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this unit via an HDMI cable. The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source selected in “TV Audio In.” J2 By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the unit. Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.” On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.” When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display. TV AV4 ■ Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode (Standby Through) Standby Through This function allows audio/video signals to continue to be transmitted to a TV connected to HDMI jacks 1-4 even when this unit is in standby mode. Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.” On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected HDMI input source to the TV. • When HDMI Control is “On,” Standby Through function is automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed. • When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals will continue to be transmitted to the TV from the selected HDMI input source when this unit is in standby mode. You can change the HDMI input source to transmit signals during the standby through mode by using dHDMI1-4 on the remote control. When the input source is changed, the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator on the front panel blinks twice. • When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/ iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby mode. When this indicator is lit, this unit consumes 1 to 3 W of power. VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR • “AudioReturnChan” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “On.” • Please refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 70) for setting instructions. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 56 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Changing the output destination of HDMI input audio signals Audio Output TV Amp+TV converted to HDMI Resolution Choose whether to playback audio from an external component such as a BD/DVD player connected via HDMI through this unit or through a TV. Amp (Default) ■ Setting resolution of analog video signals Sets the resolution during up-scaling (when analog video input is converted to HDMI video). Thrgh (Default) No up-scaling. Outputs audio through this unit only. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with this unit. 480p Upscales to 480p (progressive). 720p Upscales to 720p (progressive). Outputs audio through a TV only. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with the TV. J1 1080i Upscales to 1080i (interlace). 1080p Upscales to 1080p (progressive). Outputs audio from the TV and this unit. When this setting is selected, the external component outputs an audio format compatible with this unit and TV. “Audio Output” is only displayed with the HDMI Control function (Control) is set to “Off.” • Video resolution of 480p or less from certain old game console cannot be converted to HDMI video. Connect the game unit to video input on this unit, and connect VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack to TV. • Resolution of HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog video signals cannot be upscaled. • When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the detected resolution. • If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set “MON.CHK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP” (☞p. 67) and try again. ■ Setting the aspect ratio Aspect Sets the horizontal-to-vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of analog video converted to HDMI video signals. Thrgh (Default) Sets the horizontal-to-vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of analog video converted to HDMI video signals. 16:9 Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • “Aspect” is not displayed when “Resolution” is set to “Thrgh.” • The setting is automatically changed to “Off” for video input with aspect ratios other than 4:3. • Changing the aspect ratio for HDMI video input or analog video signals of 720p, 1080i, or 1080p has no effect. J 1 : When “TV” is selected, the speakers of this unit do not output sound. En 57 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE Making the receiver easier to use RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 ;FunctionSetup AUDIO 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING .;InputRename ;AutoPowerDown ;Dimmer ;OSDShift TUNER AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p FM INFO [ 5 2 3 Select the input source that you want to rename using jCursor B / C. Use jCursor D / E to select a new name from the following templates. Blu-ray Satellite DVD VCR SetTopBox Tape 2 3 Select the input source that you want to rename using jCursor B / C. Press jENTER. ;InputRename ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Function Setup submenu STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT CD SETUP RADIO i OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN j Input Rename Changes the input source names. Game MD AutoPowerDown Goes enter standby mode if you leave it without operating. TV PC DVR iPod Dimmer Sets the brightness of the front panel display. CD HD DVD OSD Shift Adjusts the top and bottom positions of menus displayed on the screen (OnScreen Display). CD-R (blank) DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN ■ Changing input source names 4 Input Rename Changes the input source names to be displayed on the front panel display. You can change an input source name by choosing from a list of templates, or make one of your own. ■ Selecting a template 1 Select “Input Rename” from the Setup menu and press jENTER. ;InputRename1/3 4 • • • • To cancel a name change, select the original name and then press jRETURN to exit renaming. ■ Entering an original name 1 Select “Input Rename” from the Setup menu and press jENTER. Use jCursor B / C to select the characters you want to change, and use jCursor D / E to enter those characters. The following characters are available for input source. Confirm the new display name by pressing jRETURN. Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. 5 6 A to Z, a to z 0 to 9 Symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.) Space Repeat step 4 until you have entered the new input source name. Confirm the new display name by pressing jENTER. Press iSETUP to exit the Setup menu. To cancel a name change, press jRETURN. ;InputRename1/3 Current name p .HDMI1.pHDMI1[ HDMI2.(HDMI2) HDMI3.(HDMI3) HDMI4.(HDMI4) AV1.(AV1) AV2.(AV2) []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Template [ENTER]:Edit p p p .HDMI1.pHDMI1[ HDMI2.(HDMI2) HDMI3.(HDMI3) HDMI4.(HDMI4) AV1.(AV1) AV2.(AV2) []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Template [ENTER]:Edit [p]/[[]:Position []/[]:Character [ENTER]:Set [RETURN]:Return p TV p SCENE BD DVD _________ HDMI1.HDMI1 Renaming input source Renaming input source En 58 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Goes enter standby mode automatically when you leave it without operating AutoPowerDown display Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled. 4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for four hours. 8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for eight hours. Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for twelve hours. This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the timer. Setting the sound field program You can set the parameters for the sound field programs (☞p. 60). Dimmer If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is “Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of time to pass before this unit will enter standby. 12hours ■ Setting the brightness of the front panel Sets the brightness of the front panel display. Lowering the setting dims the display. Adjustable range -4 to 0 Default setting 0 MOVIE .Sci-Fi SUR.;DolbyPLIIxMovie DSPLevel;;;;;;;;0dB Initialize ■ Adjusting the position of On-Screen p [ []/[]:Select Display Prohibiting setting changes OSD Shift Adjusts the top and bottom positions of menus displayed on the TV. Increase this value to raise the menu, or decrease the value to lower it. Adjustable range -5 to 0 to +5 Default setting 0 ;MemoryGuard G Off>On [p]/[[]:Select [RETURN]:Return Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings on Setup menu. Off (Default) Settings are not protected. On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until it is returned to “Off.” While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the settings. When this parameter is switched to “On,” “ G ” appears while the Setup menu is displayed on the TV. En 59 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP Although the sound field programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange the effect by setting the sound field elements (parameters). To adjust the sound effects suitable for acoustical conditions of audio/video sources or rooms, perform the following operations. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING 1 2 TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY Press iSETUP to display the Setup menu. Use jCursor B / C to select “DSP Parameter” and press jENTER. MUSIC Press jCursor B / C to select the parameter that you want to change, and press jCursor D / E to change the parameter. J1 STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT STRAIGHT MOVIE Straight No Parameter Standard SUR.;DolbyPLIIxMovie .*DSPLevel;;;;;;;+2dB Initialize SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO i OPTION 5 Once you have completed editing, press iSETUP to close the Setup menu. ■ To initialize the sound field parameters To set the parameters of the sound field program back to default, press jCursor C repeatedly during editing to select “Initialize” and press jCursor E. When following message is displayed, press jCursor E again to initialize. Sound field parameter ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 4 Choices MOVIE VOLUME ENTER RETURN j Standard DISPLAY [p]/[[]:Adjust INITIALIZE POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE 3 REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Use jCursor D / E to choose the sound field program you want to edit. Sound field program to be edited ENT When there are multiple parameters in the sound field program you are configuring, repeat step 4 as necessary to change other parameters. Pressagain[[] toinitialize. [[]:Done [p]:Cancel To cancel operations, press jCursor D when “Press Again” appears and return to the original display. MOVIE TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER .Standard SUR.;DolbyPLIIxMovie DSPLevel;;;;;;;;0dB Initialize [p]/[[]:Select J 1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from its default setting. En 60 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters CINEMA DSP parameters Parameters usable in certain sound field programs SUR. Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound field program in the MOVIE category. J1 Dolby PLIIxMovie (Dolby PLII Movie) Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder. Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder. 2ch Stereo only Direct Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog sound source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Auto (Default) DSP Level Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the sound effect. Adjustable range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Default setting 0 dB Off Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and “Treble” are set to 0dB. Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control circuit. • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. → Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. → Reduce the effect level. J 1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% SB Level Adjusts the volume of the surround back channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration) 50% (6.1-channel configuration) Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only Effect Level 7ch Stereo only Adjusts the effect level of the compressed music enhancer mode. CT Level Adjusts the center channel volume. J2 Adjust “DSP Level” as follows: SR Level Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% High (Default) Standard effect. Low Sets when the high-frequency signals of the source are emphasized excessively. SL Level Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% J 2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive. sound field programs. • Mono Movie • Sports • Action Game • Roleplaying Game En 61 SETUP Setting sound field program parameters Parameters usable in surround decoder When Neo:6 Music is selected Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. C.Image Panorama Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/ right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Off (Default) Disables the effect. On Enables the effect. Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0 Default setting 0.3 Center Width Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only. Adjustable range 0 to 7 Default setting 3 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Adjustable range -3 to STD to +3 Default setting STD (Standard) En 62 SETUP CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP b c You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code). The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source. HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV 1 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING Controlling other components with the remote control d Selecting input source connected to DVD player Keys connecting external components Default remote control code settings TUNER FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC DVD player ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION RETURN POP-UP MENU Selecting input source connected to CD player MUTE REC 1 CD player j DISPLAY TOP MENU Playback/Stop q VOLUME ENTER i k 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 10 DVD player 4 8 l TV VOL TV CH m Playback/Stop MUTE CD player b TRANSMIT c SOURCE A d Input selector i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER j RETURN k External component cSOURCE A Switches an external component on and off. jCursor, jENTER, jRETURN Operates the menus of external components. kDISPLAY Switches an external component display. kExternal component operation keys Functions as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. lNumeric keys Functions as numeric keys of an external component. ENT TV INPUT The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an external component, press iSETUP or qOPTION and then try operating the remote control again. mTV control keys J1 The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, please refer to “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM. Input Category Manufacturer Remote control code HDMI1 Blu-ray player/ recorder Yamaha 2064 HDMI2 — — — HDMI3 — — — HDMI4 — — — AV1 — — — AV2 — — — AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095 AV4 — — — AV5 — — — AV6 — — — mINPUT Switches video inputs of TV. AUDIO1 — — — mMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily. AUDIO2 — — — mTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV. V-AUX — — — mTV CH +/- Switches TV channels. A/B J2 — — — mA Turns on and off TV. DOCK DOCK Yamaha 5089 TUNER Tuner Yamaha 5085 operation keys k DISPLAY l Numeric keys m TV control keys m INPUT m MUTE m TV VOL +/m TV CH +/mA q OPTION J 1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in mA (mTV control keys). To register a TV remote control code to dInput selector: You can use the jCursor, lNumeric keys, and mTV To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to dInput selector: You can use the jCursor and lNumeric keys etc to control external components, and the mTV control keys to control TVs registered in mA. J 2 : Use A/B for external component operations only. Set these keys to remote control codes if you want to perform external component operations without linking to input source selection of this unit. For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes for devices such as TVs. control keys to control a TV you have registered. En 63 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP MI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 d Registering remote control codes for external component operations AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO h OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 l 1 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. • Remote control code of an external component cannot be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. • If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it does not work then try the other codes. m Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CDROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. “2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player. 4 Enter a remote control code “2064” using lNumeric keys. J2 2 blinks twice 6 0 4 Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. TRANSMIT AM PRESET INFO Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. The following section describes how to register remote control code using an example of the registration of the remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected to HDMI2 jack. TUNER FM 2 SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times SLEEP HDMI 3 Press dHDMI2 on the remote control to switch the input source to HDMI2. J1 TRANSMIT SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP Perform the following steps to register the selected input source here to the remote control code. HDMI • If the registration fails, repeat the step 2. • In case of an external component with multiple remote control codes, the other remote control codes may be supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote control codes. 5 To switch between BD player linked to scene selections, press hSCENE and at the same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Then you can operate the external components by switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting HDMI2 in the registered scene. d HDMI2 h SCENE l Numeric keys m TV control keys mA n CODE SET Same steps for operating other external components, press hSCENE and at the same time press the input source key selected in step 3 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV control keys, press mA (mTV control keys) in step 3. J 2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the mTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4. En 64 SETUP Controlling other components with the remote control CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER SLEEP Resetting all remote control codes HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Resetting all remote control codes for external components to the initial factory settings. AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT TV CD SETUP DIRECT 1 RADIO OPTION i Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. 1 Once the remote control code is reset successfully the remote control will blink twice. Reset successful: blinks twice Reset failed: blinks 6 times POP-UP MENU SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER HDMI blinks twice If setup fails, repeat from step 1. DISPLAY TOP MENU TRANSMIT SLEEP VOLUME ENTER RETURN 8 9 STEREO SCENE BD DVD Enter “9981” using lNumeric keys. 9 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. TUNER FM 3 TRANSMIT MUTE REC SOURCE CODE SET RECEIVER SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 TV INPUT TV VOL ENT l 2 Press iSETUP on the remote control. TV CH MUTE i SETUP l Numeric keys n CODE SET En 65 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows. Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu 1 2 Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. A STRAIGHT YPAO MIC INFO MEMORY PRESET FM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM Sets the impedance of speakers. REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver. BI-AMP Switches the bi-amp connections on or off. MON.CHK Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video output. TU J2 Selects one of the following FM/AM frequency steps. INIT Initializes various settings for this unit. 4 5 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you want to change. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. If initialization is selected, it will be performed when the unit is powered on again. Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers REMOTEID-ID1 The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote control to operate 2 receivers. ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in ID1. ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in ID2. AM SCENE BD DVD SP IMP. J1 RADIO STRAIGHT Setting the impedance of speakers (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the remote control ID for both remote control and receiver. SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h SPIMP.-8MIN 3 Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set from the following items. Continues to the next page Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. J3 In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings. 6 MIN Select the impedance when 6Ω speakers are connected. 8 MIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8Ω are connected. J 1 : U.S.A. and Canada models only. J 2 : Asia and General models only. J 3 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “(U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changing speaker impedance” (☞p. 12). En 66 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE n RECEIVER ■ To change the remote control ID SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING High quality playback using biamplification connections FM AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STEREO STRAIGHT DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD SETUP RADIO OPTION i VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU Press nCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. 2 3 Press iSETUP on the remote control. Enter the desired remote control ID code. Switches the bi-amp connections on or off. Refer to “Biamp connection for front speakers” (☞p. 13) for details. ON Turns bi-amp connections on. OFF (Default) Turns bi-amp connections off. Removing HDMI video output upscaling limits You can select one of the following FM/AM frequency steps: J1 AM10/FM100 You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 10kHz and FM by steps of 100kHz. AM9/FM50 (Default) You can adjust the AM frequency by steps of 9kHz and FM by steps of 50kHz. Initializing various settings for this unit To switch to ID1: Enter “5019” using lNumeric keys. MUTE TU-AM9/FM50 BI-AMP-OFF TUNER INFO Changing FM/AM frequency steps (Asia and General models only) REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT l Once the remote control code is registered successfully the remote control will blink twice. TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times TRANSMIT i SETUP l Numeric keys n CODE SET MON.CHK-YES To switch to ID2: Enter “5020” using lNumeric keys. SOURCE CODE SET Removes the up-scaling limitation on analog video resolution when this unit and a TV are connected via HDMI jacks. If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be detected when configuring the up-scaling settings, this setting will remove the output limitation. YES (Default) RECEIVER SLEEP Video output signals of a resolution not supported by the TV will not be transmitted. INIT-CANCEL Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to default. Select the items to be initialized from the following. DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound field programs. VIDEO Resets video conversion settings (resolution/aspect ratio) in the Setup menu and the OSD menus display position. ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings. CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize. HDMI SKIP • If setup fails, repeat from step 1. • Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is initialized (☞p. 65). This unit ignores the TV’s support capability and transmits input video signals to the TV. J 1 : For details on setting FM/AM frequency steps, refer to “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 35). En 67 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to operate external components via HDMI. If you connect devices that support HDMI Control (ex. Panasonic VIERA Linkcompatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) J1, you can use the following operations with the remote control of any of those devices: – Power synchronization (on/standby) – Volume control, including Mute – Changing the volume of the audio output signal device (either the TV or this unit) 1 2 3 Connect the TV, DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control to this unit’s HDMI output jack. Turn on the TV and this unit. 7 If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control function are connected to this unit, turn them on. Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder has been selected. If a different input source has been selected, please change it manually. TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is being properly received by the TV. Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external components. Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to “On.” Operations 1-7 will not be required more than twice. TV Control signal (such as volume control) HDMI connection Receiver unit Confirm that “Control” in the Setup menu (HDMI Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 56). J2 TV/DVD Recorder Check the instruction manuals for those devices. 4 Turn the TV off. 5 Turn the TV on. 6 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to this unit (ex. HDMI1). HDMI Remote control of TV This unit NOTE Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually. Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it on manually. 8 Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV through the following operations by using the TV remote control. • Power On/Off • Volume Control • Switching between audio output devices If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both devices. If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and replugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the problem. The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV, and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below. – Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On” – Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect this unit to the TV J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same manufacturer whenever possible. J 2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.” En 68 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE RECEIVER SLEEP 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER FM AM PRESET MOVIE MUSIC When the HDMI Control (☞p. 68) is operating properly, the input source of this unit is automatically changed to match operations carried out on the TV. The default input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can enjoy TV sound through this unit right away. 1 2 TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. STRAIGHT Audio output (Optical) DIRECT TV CD ARC .Control;;;;;;;;;Off StandbyThrough;Off AudioOutput;;;;Amp ;;;*Thrgh Resolution Connect TV’s audio output to this unit. The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the TV. i HDMI 1 ANTENNA OPTICAL GND AM PR SETUP Input jack AV1 or AV4 (default) Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3 Analog stereo output AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 HDMI 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM TV output jack Optical digital audio output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK RADIO PR O OPTION 75ǡ PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select 5 VOLUME ENTER j TV O DISPLAY POP-UP MENU TOP MENU OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 ;HDMI Setup Available input jacks MUTE .Control;;;;;;;;;On TV Audio In;;;;;AV4 AudioReturnChan;Off Resolution ;;;*Thrgh REC ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM 2 3 4 6 7 GND AM PR PR 75ǡ PB 5 H COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO 1 8 PB V VIDEO Y Y 0 10 ENT [ p []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select MONITOR OU 9 Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” When “On” is selected, the following menu is displayed. Y MONITOR OUT RETURN Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. ;HDMI Setup STEREO SCENE BD DVD 4 [ MEMORY To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry out the following procedure. p INFO ■ Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio HDMI TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) (TV) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV 4 MUTE 3 i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 6 Press jCursor C to select “TV Audio In” and select the input jack connected in step 2 using jCursor D / E. 7 Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the settings. Press iSETUP. J1 If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 49) for details on the Setup menu. En 69 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function CODE SET TRANSMIT SOURCE ■ Single HDMI cable input to TV RECEIVER SLEEP 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 AV When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to any input source. AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK PRESET TUNING TUNER MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT TV CD SETUP RADIO VOLUME ENTER Press iSETUP when you have finished changing the settings. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select DIRECT i 1 Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. OPTION RETURN .Control;;;;;;;;;Off StandbyThrough;Off AudioOutput;;;;Amp ;;;*Thrgh Resolution STEREO SCENE BD DVD ;HDMI Setup 7 [ AM MEMORY Use jCursor B / C to select “HDMI Setup” and press jENTER. p FM INFO 3 audio with Audio Return Channel function HDMI j 4 When “On” is selected, the following menu is displayed. TV HDMI Make sure that “Control” is selected, and then use jCursor D / E to select “On.” DISPLAY HDMI POP-UP MENU TOP MENU ;HDMI Setup MUTE .Control;;;;;;;;;On TV Audio In;;;;;AV4 AudioReturnChan;Off Resolution ;;;*Thrgh REC 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 []/[]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select HDMI 10 ENT SPEAK [ 2 5 TV audio output p 1 Video / Audio output TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 ANTENNA MUTE FM HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER GND AM PR 75ǡ 2 Press jCursor C to select “TV Audio In” and select the input source that you want to assign to the HDMI audio signals from the TV using jCursor D / E. J2 6 Press jCursor C to select “AudioReturnChan” and press jCursor E to select “On.” PB VIDEO i SETUP j Cursor B / C / D / E j ENTER 5 VIDEO Press iSETUP. J1 The Audio Return Channel function will turn on. J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 49) for details on the Setup menu. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 70 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. General Problem Cause Remedy See page The power will not turn on. The protection circuitry operated 3 times consecutively. As a safety precaution, when the protection circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the capability to turn on the power is disabled. Please contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. — The unit enters standby mode soon after the power is turned on. The power cable is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. — (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 12 The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — The batteries in the remote control may have lost their charge. Replace all batteries. 4 The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker with an impedance of at least 6Ω. — (U.S.A. and Canada models) Check that the speaker impedance settings are correct. 12 This unit cannot be turned off or does not work properly. The unit enters standby mode. Problem Cause Remedy See page After display of a countdown on the front panel, the unit goes into standby mode. If you do not use take any action, the Auto Power Down function operates. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — In the Setup menu “AutoPowerDown” (“Function Setup” → “AutoPowerDown”), increase the time until switching to standby mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down function. 59 Sound/images suddenly go off. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other, then turn the unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off the unit. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — En 71 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No sound. No picture. Cause Remedy See page Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18 If a DVI-HDMI cable is used to connect the unit with an external component, then it is necessary to use an audio input jack for a different input to output audio. Display the HDMI Input Option menu for the connected cable, select “Audio In,” and select the jack to use for audio input. 47 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The HDMI components connected to the unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 47 The audio input into the device is set to playback through the TV. In the Setup menu, set the HDMI Audio Out (“Sound Setup” → “Audio Out”) to other than “TV.” 57 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with Input selector. 29 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. — Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CDROM. Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on this unit. — The video signal output from this unit is not supported by a monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack. Displays the Advanced Setup menu and select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters. 67 Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set “MON.CHK” to “YES.” 67 An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select an appropriate video input on the TV. — Problem No sound is output from a specific speaker. Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. Cause See page Remedy The speaker is malfunctioning. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, the unit may be malfunctioning. The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12, 18 Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change to a different input source. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu, and set respective parameters to enable output from that speaker (“Speaker Setup” → “Config”). 7, 50 The volume of that speaker is set to the minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu. Display “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu and adjust the volume (“Speaker Setup” → “Level”). 52 (If hardly any sound comes from one channel) Speaker output balance is not set correctly. Balance the volume of each speaker from “Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker Setup” → “Level”). 52 Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the input source or sound field program. Try another sound field program. 30 When a monaural source sound field program is applied, for some surround decoders, sound from all channels is output from the center speaker. Try another sound field program. 30 En 7 72 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the surround speakers. Cause Remedy See page This unit is in straight decoding mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding mode. 31 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 30 No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. “Extended Surround” in the Option menu is set to “Off,” or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “Extended Surround” set to “Auto.” Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto.” 46 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. A subwoofer is not connected, or it is inactive. Check that a subwoofer is connected correctly, and from the Setup menu “Subwoofer” (“Speaker Setup” → “Config” → “Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “On.” 50 Turn the subwoofer power on. If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off sensitivity settings. — The subwoofer is turned off. — The source does not contain LFE (☞p. 78) or low frequency signals. The right combination of audio / video jacks to connect cannot be found. Combine input connected to the external component video output with another input audio jack. Display the Input Audio menu for the connected video output, select “Audio In,” and select the jack to use for audio input. 47 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its instruction manual. — There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Problem Noise/hum noise is heard. The volume cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. Cause See page Remedy Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and playback the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.” — The component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on. When the component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the sound may be distorted, or the volume may decreased due to the nature of AV receivers. Turn on all components connected to this unit. — “Max Volume” is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value. 55 En 73 APPENDIX Troubleshooting HDMI™ Problem Tuner (FM/AM) Cause Remedy See page FM Problem The front panel display HDMI indicator is flashing. No picture or sound. (When using HDMI Control function) TV sound is not output from this unit when operating the remote control of the TV. An error with the HDMI connection has occurred. Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. — Confirm that HDMI video that is not supported by the unit is not being input (HDMI Input → Option menu → “Signal Info”). 47 The number of components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. — The TV audio output is not connected to this unit, or the setting to match operations carried out on TV is not set. Connect the TV audio output to this unit, and then select the connected input source in “TV Audio In” (Setup menu → HDMI Setup → TV Audio In). 56 (When using Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return Channel function is not working. Make sure that your TV supports Audio Return Channel. Set the Audio Return Channel function to on (Setup menu → HDMI Setup → AudioReturnChan). 56 FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna is weak. See page Remedy Check the antenna connections. 23 Switch to monaural mode. 36 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station, or input from the antenna is weak. Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi element antenna. — Use TUNING H / I to manually select the station. 35 “No Presets” is displayed. No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as preset stations before operation. 36 “Wrong Station” is displayed. An invalid FM/AM frequency has been input. Input a frequency that can be received. — En 74 APPENDIX Troubleshooting iPod™/iPhone™ AM Cause The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 35 Automatic station preset does not work. Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station preset. 35 Continuous crackling and hissing noises are heard. The supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 23 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 23 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Buzzing and whining noises are heard. Remedy See page Problem Display Loading... Connect error Cause See page Remedy The unit is in the process of recognizing the connection with your iPod/iPhone. — The unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod/iPhone. — There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod/iPhone to the unit. Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of the unit. 40 Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 40 Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the unit. — Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not supported by the unit. iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Unable to play The unit cannot playback the songs currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. Check that songs are currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. En — 75 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Bluetooth™ Display Searching... Remote control Cause Remedy See page The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of pairing. — The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of establishing a connection. — Completed The pairing is completed. — Canceled The pairing is canceled. — BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. — The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. — Disconnected Not found The Bluetooth component is not found. During pairing: – pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth component and this unit simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth component is in pairing mode. During connecting: – check if the Bluetooth component is turned on. – check if the Bluetooth component is within 10 m (32 feet) of the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. External components cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause See page Remedy Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m / 20 ft, and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. — Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 66 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “Remote control code search” on the CDROM. — Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “Remote control code search” on the CD-ROM. — If this unit does not work when you press Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the Input selector again. When the key does not work during Option menu/Setup menu operation: press the key corresponding to the current menu operation again. — — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. — En 76 APPENDIX Glossary Audio information Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Bi-amplification connection A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. Dolby TrueHD DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. En 77 APPENDIX Glossary DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced. Sound field program information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. Compressed music enhancer The Compressed music enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program, so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. Video information Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http:// www.hdmi.org/.” S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the Cameroonians through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. Component video signal “x.v.Color” With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. En 78 APPENDIX Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility NOTES Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: – – – – 480i/60 Hz 576i/50 Hz 480p/60 Hz 576p/50 Hz – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz About trademarks Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. iPod™, iPhone™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark of Apple Inc. En 79 APPENDIX Specifications ■ Input jacks ■ HDMI ■ Compatible Decoding Formats • Analog audio Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX) • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel) • Digital audio Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4) Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz • Decoding Format - Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Video Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX) S-Video x 1 (AV5) [U.K. and Europe models] Component x 2 (AV1, AV2) • Other HDMI x 4 DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite]) ■ Output jacks • Analog Audio Speaker out x 7ch (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1) *1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] Subwoofer out x 1 AV OUT x 1 AUDIO OUT x 1 • Video MONITOR OUT - Component x 1 - Composite x 1 AV OUT - Composite x 1 • Other HDMI OUT x 1 • Analog up Conversion - 480i/60 Hz (NTSC) - 576i/50 Hz (PAL) - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Up-Scaling - 480i → 480p/720p/1080i/1080p - 480p → 720p/1080i/1080p - 576i → 576p/720p/1080i/1080p - 576p → 720p/1080i/1080p • Audio Format - Dolby Digital - DTS - DSD 6ch - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby TrueHD - DTS-HD - PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema ■ AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) FRONT L/R ......................................................................... 90 W/ch CENTER................................................................................... 90 W SURROUND L/R ................................................................ 90 W/ch SURROUND BACK L/R .................................................... 90 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) FRONT L/R ......................................................................... 90 W/ch CENTER................................................................................... 90 W SURROUND L/R ................................................................ 90 W/ch SURROUND BACK L/R .................................................... 90 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.....................................95/110/130/150 W [Other models] Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .............................................100/110/125 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [China, Korea, General and Asia models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ............................................................ 115 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................... 105 W • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .........................90 W+90 W En 80 APPENDIX ■ VIDEO SECTION ■ AM SECTION • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance AV5, etc .....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ........................ NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................... PAL • Maximum Input Voltage AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................... 2.0 V or more • Video Conversion...............................................................NTSC/PAL • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] .....................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ........................................................ 531 to 1611 kHz • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω ........................................................................................ 0.23 dB • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion AV5, etc. to FRONT (DIRECT) [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ....... 0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω) ............................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV5, etc. (DIRECT) Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ...............................................................................100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) ........................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control ...................................... MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB • Tone Control (Front Speakers) BASS Boost/Cut .............................................±10 dB/2 dB at 50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut......................................±10 dB/2 dB at 20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency.............................................. 3.5 kHz • Signal Level Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-Video [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) ■ GENERAL • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off) ............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General models] ................. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ........................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ..................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia models]......................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz ■ FM SECTION • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .....................................270 W/320 VA [Other models] ........................................................................ 280 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models]............................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models]............87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less HDMI Control on / Standby Through off .....................1.2 W or less HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on..........................3 W or less • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono .....................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Dimensions (W x H x D) 435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo..................................................................74 dB/69 dB • Weight 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3% * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)............. 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer)............................................................ 24 dB/oct. En 81 APPENDIX Index Numerics 5.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 11 5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10 6.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 11 6.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10 7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 11 7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 10 A Adaptive DRC, Sound Setup ....................................................... 54 Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 66 AM antenna connection ............................................................... 23 AM tuning.................................................................................... 35 Aspect, HDMI Setup.................................................................... 57 Audio In, Option menu ................................................................ 47 AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 14 Audio Output, HDMI Setup......................................................... 57 Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 70 AudioReturnChan, HDMI Setup ................................................. 56 Auto Preset................................................................................... 36 Auto Preset, Option menu............................................................ 48 Automatic traffic information reception ...................................... 39 AutoPowerDown, Function Setup ............................................... 59 B BD player connection .................................................................. 18 Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 13 BI-AMP, Advanced Setup menu ................................................. 67 Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 43 C Cable plug .................................................................................... 14 Center speaker................................................................................ 9 Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 12 CINEMA DSP indicator ................................................................ 7 Clear Preset, Option menu ........................................................... 48 COAXIAL jack ............................................................................ 14 COMPONENT VIDEO jack........................................................ 14 Config, Speaker Setup................................................................. 50 Connect, Option menu ................................................................ 48 Connecting speakers.................................................................... 11 Connections................................................................................... 9 Control, HDMI Setup.................................................................. 56 Cursor indicators ........................................................................... 7 D Decoder Mode, Option menu...................................................... Dimmer, Function Setup ............................................................. Direct mode................................................................................. Disconnect, Option menu............................................................ Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. DSP Parameter ............................................................................ DVD player connection............................................................... Dynamic Range, Sound Setup..................................................... I INIT, Advanced Setup menu....................................................... Init.Volume, Sound Setup ........................................................... Input Rename, Function Setup .................................................... iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 67 55 58 40 40 J 46 59 32 48 52 60 18 55 E Equalizer, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 52 Extended Surround, Option menu............................................... 46 External component connection.................................................. 14 F FM antenna connection ............................................................... 23 FM Mode, Option menu.............................................................. 48 FM tuning.................................................................................... 35 Front panel .................................................................................... 5 Front panel display........................................................................ 7 Front speaker ................................................................................. 9 Function Setup ............................................................................ 58 H HDMI Control function............................................................... 68 HDMI indicator............................................................................. 7 HDMI jack .................................................................................. 14 HDMI Setup ................................................................................ 55 High-frequency sound adjustment .............................................. 29 Jack.............................................................................................. 14 L Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... 52 Lipsync, Sound Setup.................................................................. 54 Low-frequency sound adjustment ............................................... 29 M Manual Preset .............................................................................. 37 Max Volume, Sound Setup ......................................................... 55 Memory Guard ............................................................................ 59 Menu browse mode ..................................................................... 41 MON.CHK, Advanced Setup menu ............................................ 67 Multi information display.............................................................. 7 MUTE indicator ............................................................................ 7 N Normal tuning.............................................................................. 35 O OPTICAL jack ............................................................................ 14 Option menu ................................................................................ 45 OSD Shift, Function Setup.......................................................... 59 P Pairing, Option menu .................................................................. 48 PHONES jack................................................................................ 5 Portable audio player connection ................................................ 22 PORTABLE jack......................................................................... 14 En 82 APPENDIX Index Preset tuning................................................................................. 36 R Radio Data System tuning ........................................................... 38 Rear panel ...................................................................................... 6 Remote control............................................................................... 8 Remote control battery installation................................................ 4 Remote control, Controlling other components........................... 63 REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu.......................................... 66 Repeat playback, iPod/iPhone ..................................................... 42 Repeat, Option menu ................................................................... 48 Resolution, HDMI Setup ............................................................. 57 S S VIDEO jack .............................................................................. 14 SCENE function........................................................................... 30 Setup menu................................................................................... 49 Shuffle playback, iPod/iPhone..................................................... 42 Shuffle, Option menu................................................................... 48 Signal Info, Option menu............................................................. 47 Simple play mode ........................................................................ 41 Sound field program .................................................................... 30 Sound field program parameter setting........................................ 60 Sound Setup ................................................................................. 54 SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu.................................................. 66 Speaker connection ........................................................................ 9 Speaker indicators.......................................................................... 7 Speaker layout.............................................................................. 10 Speaker setting ............................................................................. 24 Speaker Setup............................................................................... 50 Standby Charge, Option menu..................................................... 48 Standby Through, HDMI Setup ................................................... 56 Straight decoding mode ............................................................... 31 Subwoofer ...................................................................................... 9 Supplied accessories ...................................................................... 4 Surround back speaker ................................................................... 9 Surround speaker ........................................................................... 9 Tone control ................................................................................ 29 TrafficProgram, Option menu..................................................... 48 TU, Advanced Setup menu ......................................................... 67 Tuner indicator .............................................................................. 7 TV Audio In, HDMI Setup ......................................................... 56 TV monitor connection ............................................................... 15 V VIDEO AUX input cover.............................................................. 4 Video cameras connection .......................................................... 22 Video conversion ........................................................................ 57 VIDEO jack................................................................................. 14 VOLTAGE SELECTOR............................................................... 6 VOLUME...................................................................................... 5 VOLUME indicator ...................................................................... 7 Volume Trim, Option menu........................................................ 46 Y YPAO.......................................................................................... 24 T Test Tone, Speaker Setup ............................................................ 53 En 83 © 2010 Yamaha Corporation YC506B0/OMEN List of remote control codes Lista de códigos de mando a distancia Liste des codes de commande Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes Liste der Fernbedienungscodes Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder Elenco dei codici di telecomando TV A.R. Systems Acme Acura ADC Admiral 0320 0342 0323, 0343 0337 0054, 0178, 0336, 0337, 0339, 0346, 0347 Advent 0158 Adventura 0057 Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342 Agashi 0277, 0282 Agazi 0337 Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343 Aim 0320 Aiwa 0078, 0379 Akai 0050, 0055, 0109, 0159, 0181, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0349, 0350 Akiba 0320, 0340 Akura 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340 Alaron 0277 Alba 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0351, 0372, 0382 Albatron 0140 Alcyon 0171 Alleron 0059 Allorgan 0282 Allstar 0320, 0350 America Action 0179 AMOi 0276 Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321, 0342 Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343 Amtron 0058 Anam 0179, 0343 Anam National 0052, 0058 Anglo 0323, 0343 Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343 Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0343 AOC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053 Apex 0039, 0111, 0217 Arcam 0277, 0282 Arcam Delta 0342 Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350 Arthur Martin 0321 ASA 0339, 0347 Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350 Astra 0343 Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337, 0340, 0342 Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 Atori 0323, 0343 Auchan 0321 Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342 Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194 Ausind 0171 Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337, 0339, 0342 Aventura 0051 Awa 0277, 0282 Axion Baird Bang & Olufsen Basic Line 0156 0282 0180, 0339 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0350 Bastide 0282, 0342 Baur 0320, 0349 Bazin 0282 Beko 0161, 0269, 0294, 0302, 0311, 0320, 0328, 0351 Belcor 0008 Bell & Howell 0019, 0054 Benq 0097, 0242, 0361 Beon 0320, 0349, 0350 Best 0161 Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350 Binatone 0282, 0342 Blue Sky 0320, 0340 Blue Star 0348 Boots 0282, 0342 BPL 0320, 0348 Bradford 0058, 0179 Brandt 0322, 0345 Brillian 0182 Brinkmann 0320 Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342 Brockwood 0008 Broksonic 0109, 0179 Bruns 0339 BTC 0340 Bush 0269, 0282, 0283, 0304, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0332, 0340, 0343, 0344, 0346, 0348, 0349, 0350, 0372, 0382, 0463, 0470, 0472 Candle 0008, 0026, 0050, 0057 Capsonic 0337 Carena 0320 Carnivale 0050 Carrefour 0344 Carver 0010 Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343 Casio 0367 Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350 CCE 0183, 0282 Celebrity 0055, 0107 Celera 0039 Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350 Century 0339 CGE 0161, 0171 Changhong 0039 Chimei 0273 Cimline 0323, 0343 Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0058 City 0323, 0343 Clarion 0179 Clarivox 0349 Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350, 0351 CMS 0277 CMS Hightec 0282 Coby 0197 Colortyme 0008, 0026 Commercial Solutions 0021 Concerto 0008, 0026 Concorde 0323, 0343 Condor 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0350, 0351 Contec 0179, 0277, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0344 Contec/Cony 0012, 0058 Continental Edison 0345 Cosmel 0323, 0343 Craig 0058, 0179 Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171, 0339 Crown 0058, 0161, 0171, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351 CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342 CTC Clatronic 0341 CTX 0205 Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0049, 0050, 0178 CXC 0058, 0179 Cybertron 0340 Cytron 0152 Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0037, 0053, 0167, 0266, 0275, 0277, 0282, 0315, 0320, 0323, 0331, 0335, 0342, 0343, 0350, 0381, 0465 Dainichi 0277, 0340 Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350 Dantax 0161, 0349 Dawa 0320 Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026, 0323, 0343 De Graaf 0346 Decca 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 Dell 0145, 0245 Denver 0358, 0362 Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350 Diamant 0320 Diamond 0277 DiamondVision 0135, 0143 Dimensia 0049 Disney 0219 Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349, 0350 Dream Vision 0461, 0498 DTS 0323, 0343 Dual 0282, 0320, 0342 Dual-Tec 0342, 0343 Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062, 0282, 0339, 0341, 0342 Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179, 0215 Dux 0349 Dwin 0178 Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350 Dynex 0228, 0231 Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320 Elcit 0339 Electa 0348 ELECTRO TECH 0343 Electroband 0055, 0107 Electrograph 0176 Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052, 0055 Element 0230 -1- Elin Elite Elman Elta Emerson Emprex Envision Epson Erres ESA ESC Etron Eurofeel Euro-Feel Euroline Euroman Euromann Europhon Expert Exquisit Fenner Ferguson Fidelity Filsai Finlandia Finlux FIRST LINE Firstline Fisher Flint Formenti Formenti/Phoenix Fortress Fraba Friac Frontech Fujitsu Fujitsu General Fujitsu Siemens Funai Futuretech Galaxi Galaxis Gateway GBC GE Geant Casino GEC Geloso General Technic 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0349, 0350 0320, 0340, 0350 0341 0277, 0323, 0343 0000, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0013, 0019, 0026, 0031, 0037, 0051, 0058, 0059, 0161, 0179, 0320, 0339 0154 0008, 0026, 0050 0155, 0206, 0359 0320, 0349, 0350 0051 0282 0343 0282 0337 0349 0161, 0277, 0282 0320, 0337, 0342, 0350 0277, 0282, 0320, 0341, 0342, 0350 0321 0320 0323, 0343 0322, 0345, 0349 0277, 0320, 0342, 0346 0282 0346 0171, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342, 0349, 0350 0342, 0343, 0350 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323 0019, 0161, 0282, 0339, 0342, 0344, 0351 0320, 0350 0171, 0277, 0336, 0339, 0342, 0349 0277 0336, 0339 0161, 0320 0161 0282, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0346, 0347 0059, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0282 0282 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510, 0511 0051, 0058, 0059, 0112, 0113, 0115, 0118, 0119, 0179, 0337 0058, 0179 0320, 0351 0161, 0320 0176, 0177, 0241 0323, 0343, 0344 0008, 0021, 0023, 0026, 0027, 0031, 0034, 0049, 0052, 0056, 0209 0321 0282, 0320, 0342, 0347, 0349, 0350 0323, 0343, 0346 0323, 0343 Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347, 0350 GFM 0128, 0227 Giant 0282 Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050, 0062 GoldHand 0277 Goldline 0320 GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053, 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0346, 0349, 0350 Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350, 0462, 0473, 0477 Gorenje 0161, 0351 GPM 0340 GPX 0129 Gradiente 0240 Graetz 0347 Granada 0171, 0282, 0320, 0321, 0342, 0344, 0346, 0349, 0350 Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348, 0349 Gronic 0282 Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171, 0310, 0320 Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179 Haier 0157, 0233 Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337, 0342 Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031 Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342 Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350 Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343 Hantor 0320 Harman/Kardon 0010 Harvard 0058, 0179 Harwood 0320, 0323 Havermy 0178 HCM 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343, 0348 Hema 0282, 0323 Hewlett Packard 0192 Higashi 0277 HiLine 0320 Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0344, 0349, 0350 Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348 Hisense 0247 Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026, 0066, 0084, 0092, 0093, 0120, 0172, 0173, 0255, 0270, 0271, 0282, 0320, 0335, 0338, 0342, 0344, 0346, 0347, 0365, 0382, 0448, 0456, 0467 Hornyphon 0320, 0350 Hoshai 0340 Huanyu 0277, 0342 Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342 Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343 Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321, 0337, 0342, 0348, 0349, 0350 Hyundai 0141 Iberia 0320 ICE 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350 ICeS 0277 Ilo 0148, 0153 IMA 0058 Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350, 0351 Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350 Infinity InFocus 0010 0250, 0327, 0363, 0479, 0508 Ingelen 0347 Ingersol 0323, 0343 Initial 0153 Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 Innovation 0337, 0343 Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236, 0238 Inteq 0030 Interactive 0161 Interbuy 0323, 0343 Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339, 0347, 0349, 0350 International 0277 Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0341, 0342 Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0349, 0350 Isukai 0320, 0340 ITC 0282, 0342 ITS 0277, 0320, 0340, 0348, 0350 ITT 0343, 0347 ITV 0320, 0343, 0349 Janeil 0057 JBL 0010 JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026, 0027, 0049, 0053, 0056 JCB 0055, 0107 Jensen 0008, 0026 JVC 0012, 0014, 0015, 0056, 0064, 0065, 0067, 0169, 0174, 0297, 0314, 0344, 0350, 0375 Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0348 Kamosonic 0342 Kamp 0277, 0342 Kapsch 0347 Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342, 0343, 0349 Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055, 0277 KEC 0179 Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341, 0346 Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050 KIC 0282 Kingsley 0277, 0342 KLH 0039 Kloss Novabeam 0057, 0058 Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320 Kolster 0320, 0350 Konka 0340 Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350 Korting 0161, 0339 Kosmos 0320 Koyoda 0343 KTV 0007, 0050, 0058, 0179, 0183, 0282, 0342 Kyoto 0277, 0282 Lasat 0161 Lenco 0323, 0343 Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343 Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350 LG 0031, 0053, 0066, 0116, 0117, 0140, 0161, 0164, 0175, 0195, 0269, 0277, 0282, 0300, 0309, 0317, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0342, 0343, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0366, 0368, 0377, 0466, 0471, 0478 LG/GoldStar 0164 Liesenk 0349 Liesenkotter 0320 Life 0337, 0343 Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343 Lloyds 0323 Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265, 0320, 0330, 0352 Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350 Logik 0054 Luma 0320, 0323, 0346, 0349 Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346, 0349, 0350 Lux May 0350 Luxman 0008, 0026 Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346 LXI 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027, 0031, 0049, 0111 M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350 MAG 0096 Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349 Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342 Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010, 0013, 0026, 0032, 0033, 0048, 0050, 0128, 0211, 0212, 0224, 0226, 0239 Magnum 0337, 0343 Majestic 0054 Mandor 0337 Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349, 0350 Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026, 0050, 0204, 0320, 0349, 0350 Marelli 0339 Mark 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0349, 0350 Masuda 0282 Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0455 Matsushita 0017 Maxent 0147, 0176 Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350 Medion 0320, 0337, 0343 Megapower 0140 Megatron 0026, 0031 MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323 Melvox 0321 Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0054, 0137, 0215, 0323, 0343 Memphis 0323, 0343 Mercury 0320, 0323 Metz 0339 MGA 0008, 0026, 0031, 0050, 0053 Micromaxx 0337, 0343 Microstar 0337, 0343 Midland 0007, 0021, 0023, 0027, 0030, 0056, 0062 Minerva 0171 Minoka 0320, 0350 Mintek 0153 Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053, 0066, 0084, 0093, 0098, 0150, 0178, 0289, 0320, 0339, 0344, 0350, 0376 Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171, 0277, 0282, 0342 Monivision 0140 Montgomery Ward 0054 Motion 0171 Motorola 0052, 0178 MTC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0161, 0277 Multi System 0349 -2- Multitech Murphy NAD Naonis NEC Neckermann NEI Net-TV Neufunk New Tech New World NewTech Nicamagic Nikkai Nikko Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Nordvision Novatronic Oceanic Okano Olevia ONCEAS Onwa Opera Oppo Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orion Orline Osaki Oso Otto Versand Pael Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Panavision Pathe Cinema Pausa Penney Perdio Perfekt Philco Philharmonic Philips 0058, 0161, 0179, 0183, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0341, 0342, 0343, 0344, 0346, 0349 0277, 0342 0026, 0031, 0111 0346 0008, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053, 0072, 0103, 0282, 0344 0161, 0282, 0320, 0339, 0342, 0346, 0349, 0350, 0351 0320, 0349, 0350 0176 0320, 0323 0343, 0350 0340 0282, 0320, 0323 0277, 0342 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0349, 0350 0026, 0031, 0050 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342 0347 0201 0282 0339, 0345, 0347, 0350 0349 0320 0321, 0347 0161, 0320, 0351 0102, 0199, 0200, 0207, 0222 0342 0058, 0179 0320 0130 0017, 0019 0144 0178 0320, 0350 0043, 0146, 0283, 0320, 0323, 0328, 0343, 0349, 0350 0320 0282, 0320, 0337, 0340, 0342 0340 0282, 0320, 0336, 0342, 0344, 0348, 0349, 0350 0277, 0342 0161, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0351 0282 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343 0016, 0017, 0020, 0022, 0023, 0035, 0052, 0056, 0084, 0085, 0133, 0163, 0193, 0284, 0286, 0290, 0292, 0320, 0325, 0347, 0356 0320 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321, 0342 0323, 0343 0021, 0023, 0031, 0050, 0111 0277, 0320 0320 0008, 0009, 0010, 0012, 0026, 0050, 0052, 0053, 0161, 0171, 0320, 0339 0282, 0342 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0012, 0032, 0048, 0049, 0052, 0122, 0128, 0134, 0186, 0187, 0213, 0221, 0224, 0226, 0239, 0256, 0257, 0259, 0261, 0263, 0267, 0280, 0281, 0287, 0296, 0299, 0301, 0303, 0305, 0313, 0319, 0320, 0324, 0333, 0339, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0353, 0357, 0360, 0380, 0383, 0452, 0459, 0460 Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033 Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350 Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050 Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094, 0095, 0161, 0320, 0345, 0347, 0349, 0350, 0458 Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337, 0350 Playsonic 0282 Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202, 0234 Poppy 0323, 0343 Portland 0007, 0008, 0026, 0053 Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346 Precision 0282, 0342 Prima 0157, 0243, 0323, 0343, 0347 Princeton 0140 Prism 0023, 0056 Profex 0323, 0343 Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350 Proline 0320, 0350 Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049 Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349 Protech 0282, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 Proton 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031 Protron 0196 PROVIEW 0096, 0246 Provision 0320, 0349 Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062 Pye 0256, 0320, 0349, 0350, 0378 Pymi 0323, 0343 Quandra Vision 0321 Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052, 0056 Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342, 0349, 0350 Questa 0344 Radialva 0320 RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031, 0050, 0179, 0320 RadioShack/Realistic 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0049, 0058 Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 Radiomarelli 0320, 0339 Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323, 0350 Rank 0344 RCA 0008, 0021, 0024, 0025, 0026, 0027, 0042, 0049, 0052, 0053, 0063, 0136, 0225 Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050, 0179 Recor 0320 Redstar 0320 Reflex 0320 Revox 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350 Rex 0337, 0346, 0347 RFT 0161, 0168, 0339 Rhapsody 0277 R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350 Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343 Robotron Rowa Royal Lux RTF Runco Saba 0339 0277, 0282 0161 0339 0030, 0050, 0062 0298, 0322, 0339, 0345, 0347 Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343 Salora 0346, 0347 Sambers 0171, 0341 Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050, 0176 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0036, 0050, 0053, 0076, 0077, 0079, 0114, 0124, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0139, 0161, 0183, 0185, 0190, 0191, 0258, 0264, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0334, 0337, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350, 0351, 0373, 0453, 0468 Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342 Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320, 0350 Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068, 0070, 0071, 0099, 0161, 0168, 0223, 0237, 0277, 0282, 0288, 0295, 0323, 0342, 0344, 0369, 0469 SBR 0320, 0349 Sceptre 0235, 0244 Schaub Lorenz 0347 Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318, 0320, 0333, 0340, 0342, 0349, 0350, 0382 Scotch 0026, 0031 Scott 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059, 0149, 0179 Sears 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026, 0027, 0031, 0049, 0051, 0059, 0111 SEG 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0341, 0342, 0344, 0349, 0382 SEI 0320 SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347 Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347 Sencora 0323, 0343 Sentra 0323 Serino 0277 Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026, 0060, 0088, 0089, 0091, 0138, 0165, 0170, 0178, 0198, 0229, 0262, 0278, 0279, 0291, 0308, 0312, 0336, 0344, 0354, 0370, 0449, 0450, 0451, 0464, 0474, 0476 Sheng Chia 0178 Shogun 0008 Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341 Sierra 0320, 0350 Siesta 0161 Signature 0054 Silva 0277 Silver 0344 Singer 0321, 0339, 0341 Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341, 0349 Skantic 0347 Solavox 0347 Sonitron 0161, 0282 Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 Sonolor 0321, 0347 Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350 Sony 0038, 0044, 0045, 0047, 0055, 0104, 0105, 0107, 0110, 0123, 0184, 0220, 0248, 0249, 0251, 0252, 0254, 0326, 0343, 0344, 0371, 0374, 0457, 0475 Sound & Vision 0340, 0341 Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031, 0058, 0059, 0179 Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350 Squareview 0051 SSS 0008, 0058, 0179 Standard 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0350 Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320, 0323, 0349 Stenway 0348 Stern 0346, 0347 Strato 0320, 0323 Stylandia 0282 Sunkai 0343 Sunstar 0320, 0323 Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343, 0350 Superla 0277, 0282, 0342 Superscan 0013, 0178 SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323 Supra 0323, 0343 Supre-Macy 0057 Supreme 0055, 0107 Susumu 0340 Sutron 0323, 0343 SVA 0151 Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342 Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011, 0013, 0026, 0048, 0050, 0051, 0128, 0227, 0253 Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062, 0128, 0179, 0215 Syntax 0199 Syntax-Brillian 0199 Sysline 0349 Sytong 0277 Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336, 0340, 0342, 0347 Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342, 0344, 0346 Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349, 0350 TCM 0337, 0343 Teac 0282, 0320 Tec 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343 Technics 0017, 0023, 0056 TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497, 0499 Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026, 0056 TEDELEX 0282 Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010, 0012, 0026, 0053, 0054, 0058, 0059, 0179 Teleavia 0345 Telecor 0282, 0320 Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345, 0350 Telegazi 0320 Telemeister 0320 Telesonic 0320 Telestar 0320 Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349 Teleton 0282, 0342 Televideon 0277 Televiso 0321 Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343, 0350 -3- Tesmet Tevion Texet 0350 0337, 0343 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342 Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189, 0285, 0320, 0322, 0342, 0345, 0350 Thorn 0320, 0349 TMK 0008, 0026, 0031 TNCi 0030 Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350 Tokyo 0277, 0342 Tomashi 0348 Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040, 0041, 0046, 0073, 0100, 0103, 0108, 0109, 0111, 0121, 0132, 0166, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0217, 0260, 0268, 0282, 0283, 0293, 0304, 0306, 0307, 0329, 0344, 0355, 0454 Totevision 0007 Towada 0282, 0347 Trakton 0282 Trans Continens 0282, 0320 Transtec 0277 Trident 0282 Triumph 0320 Uher 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347, 0350 Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339, 0341, 0342 Unic Line 0320 United 0349 Universum 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350, 0351 Univox 0320 Vector Research 0050 Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346, 0347, 0349, 0350, 0351 Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349 Victor 0015, 0344, 0350 VIDEOLOGIC 0277 Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342 VideoSystem 0320, 0350 Videotechnic 0277, 0282 Vidikron 0010 Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053 Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232, 0364 Viking 0057 Viore 0148 Visiola 0277, 0342 Vision 0282, 0320, 0350 Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218, 0242, 0500, 0501, 0502, 0503, 0506 Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350 Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339, 0346, 0347, 0350 Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342 Wards 0008, 0009, 0010, 0026, 0031, 0048, 0049, 0050, 0053, 0054, 0059 Watson 0320, 0349, 0350 Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342 Waycon 0111 Wega 0320, 0339, 0344 Wegavox 0323 Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350 Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220 White Westinghouse 0037, 0090, 0277, 0320, 0341, 0342, 0349 Wincom 0101, 0106 Xrypton 0320 Yamaha Yamishi Yokan Yoko Yorx Zanussi Zenith 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0086, 0087 0282, 0320 0320 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340, 0342, 0343, 0349, 0350 0340 0282, 0346 0008, 0028, 0029, 0030, 0031, 0054, 0061, 0062 VCR ABS Adventura Adyson Aiwa 1016 1069 1008 1024, 1026, 1027, 1069 Akai 1021, 1027 Akiba 1008, 1029 Akura 1008, 1027, 1029 Alba 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, 1030 Alienware 1016 Ambassador 1030 American High 1068 Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026 Anitech 1008, 1029 Apex 1088 ASA 1028, 1031 Asha 1070 Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1031 Audio Dynamics 1064 Audiosonic 1009 Audiovox 1071 Baird 1009, 1025, 1026, 1027 Bang & Olufsen 1017 Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, 1030 Baur 1028 Beaumark 1070 Bell & Howell 1065 Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030 Black Panther Line 1009, 1025 Blaupunkt 1028 Bondstec 1008, 1030 Broksonic 1100 Bush 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1029, 1049, 1051, 1063, 1217 Calix 1071 Candle 1070, 1071 Canon 1068 Cathay 1009 Catron 1030 CGE 1026, 1027 Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029 CineVision 1104 Citizen 1070, 1071 Clatronic 1008, 1030 Colortyme 1064 Condor 1009, 1025, 1030 Craig 1070, 1071 Crown 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1030 Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070 Cybernex 1070 CyberPower 1016 Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030, 1038, 1069, 1223 Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029 Dantax 1024 Daytron 1009, 1025 DBX 1064 De Graaf 1028 Decca 1026, 1027, 1028 Dell 1016 Denko 1008 DiamondVision 1096 DigiFusion 1014 DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1116, 1122 Dish Network 1018 Dishpro 1018 Dual 1009, 1027, 1028 Dumont 1026, 1028 Durabrand 1114 Dynatech 1069 Echostar 1018 Elbe 1009 Elcatech 1008 Electrohome 1071 Electrophonic 1071 Elsay 1008 Elta 1008, 1009, 1029 Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068, 1069, 1071 ESC 1009, 1025 Etzuko 1008, 1029 Expressvu 1018 Ferguson 1027 Fidelity 1008, 1026 Finlandia 1028 Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028 Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029, 1031 Fisher 1065 Flint 1024 Formenti/Phoenix 1028 Frontech 1030 Fuji 1068 Fujitsu 1026 Funai 1026, 1069 Galaxy 1026 Garrard 1069 Gateway 1016 GBC 1029, 1030 GE 1068, 1070 GEC 1028 Geloso 1029 General 1030 General Technic 1024 GOI 1018 GoldHand 1008, 1029 Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064, 1071 Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029, 1030, 1031 Gradiente 1069 Graetz 1027 Granada 1028 Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026, 1029, 1030, 1031 Grundig 1028, 1029 Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031 Harley Davidson 1069 Harman/Kardon 1064 Harwood 1008 HCM 1008, 1029 Headquarter 1065 Hewlett Packard 1016 Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029 Hisawa 1024 Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027, 1028, 1046, 1062 HNS 1110 Howard Computers 1016 HP 1016 HTS 1018 Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122 Hughes Network Systems 1110, 1116 Humax 1012, 1110, 1113 Hush 1016 Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029 iBUYPOWER 1016 Impego 1030 Imperial 1026 Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025, 1028, 1029, 1030 Innovation 1024 Instant Replay 1068 Interbuy 1008, 1031 Interfunk Intervision Irradio ITT ITV JC Penney 1028 1009, 1026 1008, 1029, 1031 1027 1009, 1025, 1031 1064, 1065, 1068, 1070, 1071 JCL 1068 JVC 1007, 1018, 1027, 1039, 1064, 1065, 1066, 1067, 1078, 1089, 1092, 1093, 1094, 1095, 1113, 1208, 1209, 1212, 1213, 1215, 1218 Kaisui 1008, 1029 Karcher 1028 Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025, 1030 Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065 Kodak 1068, 1071 Korpel 1008, 1029 Kyoto 1008 Lenco 1025 Leyco 1008, 1029 LG 1010, 1026, 1031, 1047, 1054, 1056, 1071, 1103, 1221 Lifetec 1024 Linksys 1016 Lloyd's 1069 Loewe Opta 1028, 1031 Logik 1008, 1029 Lumatron 1009, 1025 Luxor 1008 LXI 1071 M Electronic 1026 Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114, 1126 Magnin 1071 Manesth 1008, 1029 Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065, 1068 Mark 1009 Marta 1071 Matsui 1024, 1031 Matsushita 1068 Media Center PC 1016 Mediator 1028 Medion 1024 MEI 1068 Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031, 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071, 1098, 1114 Memphis 1008, 1029 MGN Technology 1070 Micromaxx 1024 Microsoft 1016 Microstar 1024 Migros 1026 Mind 1016 Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079 Motorola 1068 MTC 1070 Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030, 1069, 1070 Murphy 1026 NEC 1027, 1064, 1065 Neckermann 1027, 1028 NEI 1028 Nesco 1008, 1029 Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030 Nikko 1071 Niveus Media 1016 Noblex 1070 Nokia 1009, 1027 Nordmende 1027 Northgate 1016 Oceanic 1026, 1027 Okano 1008, 1009, 1024 Olympus 1068 Optimus 1071 Orion 1023, 1024, 1051, 1115, 1217 Orson 1026 Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031 -4- Otto Versand Palladium 1028 1008, 1027, 1029, 1031 Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044, 1055, 1068, 1072, 1085, 1090, 1091, 1120, 1121, 1214 Pathe Marconi 1027 Perdio 1026 Philco 1008, 1068 Philips 1006, 1013, 1028, 1035, 1040, 1045, 1046, 1050, 1058, 1059, 1061, 1068, 1076, 1101, 1110, 1113, 1116, 1117, 1122, 1126, 1210, 1211 Philips Magnavox 1076 Phonola 1028 Pilot 1071 Pioneer 1028, 1036 Polaroid 1088, 1099 Portland 1009, 1025, 1030 Prinz 1026 Profex 1029 Proline 1026 Proscan 1019 Prosonic 1009, 1024 Pulsar 1114 Pye 1028, 1102 Quarter 1065 Quartz 1065 Quasar 1068 Quelle 1026, 1028 Radialva 1008 RadioShack 1071 RadioShack/Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 Radiola 1028 Radix 1071 Randex 1071 RCA 1019, 1068, 1070, 1075, 1110, 1113, 1122, 1125 Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 ReplayTV 1022, 1123 Rex 1027 RFT 1008, 1028, 1030 Ricavision 1016 Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029, 1031 Royal 1008 Runco 1114 Saba 1027 Saisho 1024, 1029 Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041, 1043, 1057, 1060, 1070, 1084, 1110, 1116, 1122, 1124, 1220, 1222 Samurai 1008, 1030 Sanky 1114 Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106, 1115 Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070 Saville 1009 SBR 1028 Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027 Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025, 1026, 1028, 1029, 1030, 1031 Sears 1065, 1068, 1071 SEG 1008, 1009, 1029 SEI-Sinudyne 1028 Seleco 1027 Sentra 1008, 1030 Sentron 1008, 1029 Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077, 1107, 1127, 1219 Shintom 1008, 1029 Shivaki 1031 Shogun 1070 Siemens 1031 Silva 1031 Silver 1009 Singer 1068 Sinudyne Solavox Sonic Blue Sonneclair Sonoko Sontec Sony 1028 1030 1022, 1123 1008 1009, 1025 1031 1001, 1016, 1048, 1053, 1073, 1074, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1108, 1118, 1216 Stack 1016 Stack 9 1016 Standard 1009, 1025 Stern 1009 STS 1068 Sunkai 1024 Sunstar 1026 Suntronic 1026 Sunwood 1008, 1029 Superscan 1020 Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069, 1102, 1126 Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126 Systemax 1016 Tagar Systems 1016 Taisho 1024 Tandberg 1009 Tandy 1065 Tashiko 1026, 1071 Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028 TCM 1015, 1024, 1042 Teac 1009, 1069 Tec 1008, 1009, 1030 Technics 1068 Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071 Teleavia 1027 Telefunken 1027 Teletech 1008, 1009 Tenosal 1008, 1029 Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031 Tevion 1024 Thomson 1005, 1027 Thorn 1027 Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111, 1113, 1117, 1118, 1119, 1122 TMK 1070 Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031 Tonsai 1029 Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027, 1028, 1037, 1049, 1052, 1086, 1087, 1097, 1109, 1112, 1194 Totevision 1070, 1071 Touch 1016 Towada 1008, 1029 Towika 1008, 1029 TVA 1030 Uher 1031 UltimateTV 1019 Ultravox 1009 Unitech 1070 United Quick Star 1009, 1025 Universum 1026, 1028, 1031 Vector Research 1064 Video Concepts 1064 Videon 1024 Videosonic 1070 Viewsonic 1016 Voodoo 1016 Wards 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071 Weltblick 1031 XR-1000 1068, 1069 Yamaha 1064, 1065 Yamishi 1008, 1029 Yokan 1008, 1029 Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030, 1031 Zenith 1114 ZT Group 1016 DVD 4Kus 2051 Accurian Advent AEG Airis Aiwa Akai 2142 2155, 2251 2362 2364 2322 2145, 2177, 2179, 2248 Akura 2356 Alba 2064, 2165, 2186, 2337, 2346 Alco 2149 Alize 2361 Allegro 2133 Amitech 2362 Amphion MediaWorks 2195 AMW 2195, 2363 Apex 2030, 2124, 2125, 2126, 2127, 2130, 2131 Apple 2241 Arrgo 2138 Asono 2364 Aspire 2152, 2222 Astar 2240 ATACOM 2364 Audiovox 2061, 2149 Avious 2367 Awa 2363 Axion 2249 Bang & Olufsen 2128 Baze 2367 BBK 2364 Bellagio 2363 Best Buy 2359 Blaupunkt 2131 Blue Parade 2157 Boghe 2382 Brainwave 2362 Brandt 2148, 2188 Broksonic 2145, 2146 Bush 2064, 2110, 2170, 2268, 2290, 2346, 2358, 2367, 2383 California Audio Labs 2151 Cambridge Audio 2354 CAT 2352, 2353 CAVS 2192 Centrum 2353 CGV 2354, 2362 Changhong 2140 Cinetec 2363 CineVision 2133, 2237 Clatronic 2358, 2367 Coby 2031, 2046, 2360 Conia 2383 Continental Edison 2363 Crown 2362 C-Tech 2355 Curtis Mathes 2139 CVG 2377 CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138, 2187, 2336 Cytron 2244 Daenyx 2363 Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276, 2298, 2330, 2362, 2363, 2377 Daewoo International 2363 Dalton 2357 Dansai 2362, 2381 Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363 Dayton 2363 DEC 2358 Decca 2362 Denon 2059, 2151, 2193, 2332 Denver 2356, 2358, 2360, 2370 Denzel 2380 Desay 2205 Diamond 2354, 2355 DiamondVision 2225, 2232 Disney 2010, 2028 DK Digital 2339 Dmtech 2176 Dual 2380 Durabrand 2136 DVX 2355 Easy Home 2359 Eclipse 2354 E-Dem 2364 Electrohome 2362 Elin 2362 Elta 2341, 2361, 2362 Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150 Enterprise 2129 Enzer 2380 Epson 2247 ESA 2137 Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367 Fintec 2377 Fisher 2134 Funai 2137 Gateway 2051 GE 2029, 2131, 2156 Gericom 2351 GFM 2226 Giec 2382 Global Solutions 2355 Global Sphere 2355 Go Video 2133, 2213 Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291, 2358, 2371, 2376, 2382 GPX 2227 Gradiente 2151 Graetz 2380 Greenhill 2131 Grundig 2349 Grunkel 2362, 2366 GVG 2377 H&B 2358 H_her 2364 Haaz 2354, 2355 Haier 2254 Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135 HiMAX 2359 Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115, 2274, 2282, 2316, 2359, 2380 Hiteker 2130 Home Tech Industries 2364 Hyundai 2366 Ilo 2245 Initial 2131, 2245 Innovation 2182 Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253 Integra 2157 Irradio 2053 iSymphony 2246 JBL 2135 JVC 2020, 2096, 2097, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107, 2160, 2257, 2260, 2262, 2263, 2321, 2324, 2326, 2327, 2343, 2464, 2465, 2468, 2469, 2471 Jwin 2198 Kansai 2360 Kawasaki 2149 Kennex 2362 Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348 KeyPlug 2362 Kiiro 2362 Kingavon 2358 Kiss 2380 KLH 2131, 2149 Koda 2358 Koss 2013, 2148, 2158 KXD 2359 Landel 2143 Lasonic 2132 Lawson 2355 Lecson 2381 Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367 Lenoxx 2136, 2153 -5- LG Life Lifetec Limit Liquid Video Liteon Loewe LogicLab Magnavox Magnex Majestic Marantz Marquant Matsui McIntosh Mecotek Medion Memorex MiCO Micromaxx Microsoft Microstar Minoka Minowa Mintek Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka Mustek Mx Onda Mystral Naiko Nesa Neufunk Nevir Next Base Nexxtech NU-TEC Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orava Orbit Orion Oritron P&B Pacific Panasonic Parasound peeKTON Philips Phonotrend Pioneer 2002, 2033, 2038, 2057, 2129, 2133, 2189, 2191, 2223, 2238, 2270, 2288, 2335, 2373, 2375 2182 2182 2355 2158 2043, 2051, 2142 2320 2355 2025, 2050, 2137, 2150, 2159, 2224, 2230, 2358 2367 2360 2328 2362 2148, 2378 2199 2362 2182 2028, 2145, 2234 2354, 2382 2182 2156 2182 2362 2367 2131, 2245 2003 2358, 2359 2380 2186 2354 2366 2362 2131 2380 2362 2143 2243 2383 2159, 2368 2051 2196, 2255 2381 2180 2358 2363 2073, 2110 2148, 2158 2358 2355 2011, 2024, 2034, 2042, 2058, 2062, 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117, 2118, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2151, 2159, 2164, 2166, 2167, 2172, 2173, 2175, 2209, 2214, 2275, 2277, 2278, 2281, 2282, 2283, 2301, 2374, 2470 2197 2364 2008, 2012, 2025, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2053, 2060, 2072, 2108, 2111, 2147, 2159, 2163, 2169, 2174, 2181, 2185, 2230, 2261, 2266, 2267, 2286, 2287, 2289, 2295, 2300, 2302, 2317, 2328, 2338, 2342, 2350, 2467 2367 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2035, 2092, 2094, 2095, 2109, 2157, 2180, 2190, 2212, 2269, 2272, 2299, 2304, 2305, 2306, 2307, 2308, 2309, 2310, 2311, 2344, 2345, 2347, 2379 Pointer 2362 Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235 Portland 2362 Powerpoint 2363 Prima 2252 Proceed 2130 Proscan 2156 Prosonic 2360, 2377 Protron 2202 Provision 2358 Pye 2144 Qwestar 2148 Raite 2380 RCA 2021, 2029, 2104, 2105, 2131, 2149, 2156, 2157, 2229 RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362 Regent 2153 Reoc 2355 Rimax 2361 Rio 2133 Roadstar 2331, 2358 Ronin 2363 Rotel 2203 Rowa 2154, 2383 Rownsonic 2353 Saba 2148, 2188 Sabaki 2355 Saivod 2362 Sampo 2141 Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077, 2112, 2113, 2114, 2115, 2151, 2200, 2216, 2219, 2228, 2264, 2265, 2271, 2279, 2294, 2303, 2329, 2365 Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354, 2355, 2362 Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217, 2292 ScanMagic 2186 Schaub Lorenz 2362 Schneider 2176 Scientific Labs 2355 Scott 2161, 2357 Seeltech 2364 SEG 2162, 2355, 2363, 2380 Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088, 2091, 2182, 2194, 2220, 2221, 2231, 2236, 2293, 2340 Shinsonic 2245 Sigmatek 2359, 2364 Silva 2356 Singer 2354, 2355 Skymaster 2325, 2355 Skyworth 2356 Slim Art 2362 SM Electronic 2355 Sonic Blue 2133 Sontech 2366 Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009, 2014, 2015, 2023, 2026, 2027, 2052, 2068, 2069, 2070, 2071, 2074, 2075, 2084, 2085, 2087, 2168, 2171, 2208, 2210, 2211, 2258, 2273, 2284, 2285, 2312, 2313, 2314, 2315, 2318, 2319, 2466 Soundmaster 2355 Soundmax 2355 Spectra 2363 Spectroniq 2201 Standard 2355 Star Cluster 2355 Starmedia 2358, 2364 Sungale 2204 Sunkai 2362 Superscan 2150 Supervision 2355 Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150, 2178, 2230, 2239 Symphonic 2108, 2230 Synn 2355 T.D.E. Systems 2366 Tatung 2001, 2362 TCM 2182, 2297 Teac 2149, 2333, 2355, 2383 Tec 2356 Technics 2151 Technika 2362, 2367 Telefunken 2353 Tensai 2362 Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357 Theta Digital 2157 Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334, 2372 Tokai 2356, 2380 Top Suxess 2364 Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2048, 2049, 2054, 2055, 2072, 2073, 2076, 2078, 2079, 2086, 2145, 2159, 2218, 2233, 2256, 2259, 2296, 2369 TRANScontinents 2363, 2367 Transonic 2367 Trio 2362 Trutech 2242 TruVision 2359 TSM 2364 Umax 2361 United 2367 Urban Concepts 2159 US Logic 2245 Venturer 2149 Viewmaster 2364 Vocopro 2206 VocoStar 2207 Waitec 2364 Welltech 2382 Westinghouse 2063, 2250 Wharfedale 2354, 2355 Woxter 2361, 2364 Xbox 2156, 2183 Xlogic 2355, 2362 XMS 2362 Xoro 2382 Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363 Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065, 2080, 2081, 2082, 2083, 2089, 2118, 2151, 2323 Yamakawa 2363, 2380 Yukai 2186 Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133, 2159, 2223 Blu-ray Disc LG Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Yamaha 2033 2011, 2209, 2214 2212 2045, 2113 2194, 2220, 2221 2075 2064 DVR Bush Hitachi Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Toshiba Yamaha 2110 2090 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116, 2117, 2119, 2120, 2122, 2123 2108, 2111 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2092, 2094, 2095, 2109 2105 2113, 2219 2088, 2091 2084, 2085, 2087 2086 2089, 2118 DVD Recorder Aspire Astar Broksonic Go Video Hitachi Insignia Irradio JVC LG Liteon Panasonic Philips Pioneer Pye Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sony Sylvania Toshiba Yamaha 2222 2240 2146 2213 2062 2002 2053 2100, 2101, 2106, 2107 2033, 2057, 2223, 2238 2043 2011, 2034, 2058, 2062, 2116, 2117, 2119, 2120, 2121, 2123 2008, 2044, 2050, 2051, 2147 2017, 2035 2144 2000, 2112, 2216 2073 2217 2004, 2005, 2007, 2052, 2068, 2069, 2074, 2208, 2210, 2211 2239 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039, 2049, 2054, 2055, 2076 2056 Cable ABC 3002, 3003, 3017, 3066, 3067, 3086, 3093, 3119, 3122 ADB 3020 Adelphia 3081 Alcatel 3016 Americast 3124 Amstrad 3022, 3098 Antronix 3065, 3070 Archer 3070 Arcon 3098 AT&T 3095 Axis 3098 Bell South 3124 Cable Vision 3092 Cabletenna 3065 Cabletime 3104 Cableview 3087 Clearmaster 3127 ClearMax 3127 Clyde Cablevision 3105 Colour Voice 3068 Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117 Comcrypt 3107 Comtronics 3069 Contec 3074 Coolmax 3127 COX 3084 Cryptovision 3110 Director 3084 Eastern 3075 Everquest 3123 Fidelity 3098 Filmnet 3107 Filmnet Cablecrypt 3111 Filmnet Comcrypt 3111 Finlux 3097 Focus 3126 Foxtel 3022 France Telecom 3100, 3101 Freebox 3023 GC Electronics 3070 GE 3066, 3093 GEC 3105 Gemini 3072, 3123 General Instrument 3017, 3025, 3066, 3084, 3090, 3096, 3117 -6- Goldstar Gooding Grundig Hamlin Hirschmann Hitachi HomeChoice Humax ITT Nokia Jasco Jerrold 3120 3099 3098, 3099 3073, 3078 3097 3066 3106 3021, 3080, 3083 3097 3123 3017, 3018, 3025, 3066, 3072, 3084, 3090, 3096, 3119, 3123 JVC 3099 Kabel Deutschland 3024, 3027, 3121 Macab 3101 Magnavox 3079 Maspro 3099 Matsui 3099 MegaCable 3117 Memorex 3076, 3122 Minerva 3099 Mnet 3107 Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084, 3088, 3090, 3095, 3117 Movie Time 3077, 3109 Mr Zapp 3101 Multichoice 3107 Multitech 3127 NEC 3064 NET Brazil 3085 Nokia 3097 Noos 3101 NSC 3077 Oak 3074 Pace 3006, 3089, 3121 Palladium 3099 Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122 Paragon 3122 Philips 3068, 3071, 3079, 3099, 3100, 3101, 3103 Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094, 3098, 3114, 3116, 3120 Popular Mechanics 3126 Proscan 3066, 3093 Pulsar 3122 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 3018 Quasar 3122 RadioShack 3123, 3127 RCA 3030, 3031, 3087, 3118 Realistic 3070 Recoton 3126 Regal 3078 Regency 3075 Rembrandt 3066 Runco 3122 Sagem 3101 Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114, 3120 SAT 3098 Scientific Atlanta 3000, 3001, 3002, 3003, 3006, 3028, 3029, 3081, 3086, 3089, 3094, 3095, 3108 Signal 3072, 3123 Signature 3066 Sony 3092, 3125 Sprucer 3118 Standard Component 3115 Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119, 3123 Stargate 3072, 3123 Starquest 3072, 3123 Supercable 3090 Supermax 3127 Tele+1 3107, 3111 Telepiu 3107 Thomson 3082, 3091 TIME WARNER 3084 Tocom Torx Toshiba Tristar Tudi Tusa TV86 Unika United Cable Universal Universum V2 Videoway View Star Viewmaster Vision Visiopass Vortex View Wittenberg Zenith Zentek 3067 3017 3122 3127 3102 3072, 3123 3077 3065, 3070 3018, 3119 3065, 3070 3097, 3099 3127 3019 3074, 3077, 3079 3127 3127 3097, 3100, 3101 3127 3098 3113, 3122, 3124 3126 Satellite AB Sat AccessHD ADB AGS Akai Alba 4216, 4217 4104 4220 4216 4053, 4055 4001, 4004, 4006, 4007, 4062, 4217 Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010 Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055 Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024 Alltech 4217 Alpha 4053 Alpha Digital 4104 Alphastar 4077 Amitronica 4217 Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217, 4218 Anglo 4217 Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024, 4217 Anttron 4001, 4004 Apollo 4001 Armstrong 4011, 4053 Artec 4100 Asat 4053, 4055 ASLF 4217 Astacom 4216 Astra 4009, 4011, 4054, 4217, 4219 Astro 4004, 4008, 4010, 4015, 4024, 4213, 4218, 4219 AudioTon 4004, 4048 Aurora 4222 Austar 4222 Axiel 4216 Axis 4008, 4009, 4024, 4050 Best 4008, 4024 Blaupunkt 4015 Blue Sky 4217 Boca 4011, 4054, 4059, 4217 Boston 4216 Brain Wave 4013 Broadcast 4012 Broco 4217 BSkyB 4035, 4041 BT 4216 Bubu Sat 4217 Bush 4006, 4045 Cambridge 4218 Canal Satellite 4213 Canal+ 4213 CaptiveWorks 4099 Channel Master 4007, 4110 Chaparral 4075 CHEROKEE 4216 Chess 4212, 4217 CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219 Clatronic 4013 CNT 4010 Comag 4080, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4086 Commlink Comtech Condor Connexions Conrad 4005 4050 4008, 4024, 4219 4014, 4024 4024, 4215, 4218, 4219 Conrad Electronic 4217, 4219 Contec 4050 Coolsat 4096 Cosat 4048 Coship 4109 Crown 4011 Daeryung 4014 Daewoo 4057, 4217 DDC 4007 Delega 4007 Dew 4050 Diamond 4051 Digiality 4219 Digital Stream 4105 DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067, 4068, 4070, 4071, 4074, 4107, 4116, 4119, 4121, 4122, 4123, 4127, 4192, 4193, 4194, 4195, 4196, 4197, 4198, 4199, 4200, 4201, 4202, 4203, 4206, 4207, 4221 Discoverer 4212 Discovery 4216 Diseqc 4216 Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092, 4094, 4095, 4117 Dishpro 4018, 4117 Distrisat 4053 Ditristrad 4048 DNT 4014, 4053, 4055 Drake 4072 DStv 4222 Dune 4024 Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065, 4089, 4117, 4217 Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011, 4217, 4218 Elap 4216, 4217 Elekta 4010 Elsat 4217 Elta 4001, 4008, 4024, 4048, 4053, 4055 Emanon 4001 Emme Esse 4008, 4024 Engel 4217 Ep Sat 4006 EURIEULT 4031 Eurodec 4052 Europa 4053, 4218, 4219 Europhon 4219 Eurosat 4011 Eurosky 4024, 4011, 4008, 4215, 4218, 4219 Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219 Eutelsat 4217 Exator 4001, 4004 Expressvu 4117 Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217 Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214 Fidelity 4218 Finlandia 4006 Finlux 4006 FinnSat 4050, 4052 Flair Mate 4217 Foxtel 4222 Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218 FTEmaximal 4024, 4217 Fuba 4024, 4001, 4008, 4014, 4015, 4055, 4215 Galaxis 4024, 4005, 4008, 4009, 4050, 4048, 4215, 4222 GE 4093, 4066, 4111, 4197 General Instrument 4073, 4019 GMI 4011 GOI 4117 Goldbox GoldStar Goodmans Goodmind Grandin Grothusen Grundig 4213 4049 4029, 4002, 4006 4111 4031 4001, 4049 4006, 4004, 4015, 4035, 4211, 4218, 4222 Hänsel & Gretel 4219 Hantor 4001, 4013 Hanuri 4010 Hauppauge 4044 Heliocom 4219 Helium 4219 Hinari 4007 Hirschmann 4024, 4015, 4210, 4218, 4219, 4216 Hisawa 4013 Hisense 4016 Hitachi 4114, 4006, 4199, 4203 Homecast 4087, 4084, 4085 Houston 4048 HTS 4117 Hughes 4064, 4068, 4194, 4192, 4196, 4202 Hughes Network Systems 4071 Humax 4097, 4025, 4030, 4060 Huth 4005, 4011, 4012, 4013, 4050, 4048, 4219, 4223 Hypson 4031 Ilo 4016 Imex 4031 Innovation 4008 Insignia 4107 Intertronic 4011 Intervision 4048, 4219 ITT Nokia 4006 Jerrold 4019 Johansson 4013 JOK 4216 JSR 4048 JVC 4089, 4065, 4117, 4029 Kamm 4217 Kathrein 4015, 4055, 4053, 4063, 4034, 4042, 4215, 4216, 4217 Kathrein Eurostar 4215 Klap 4216 Konig 4219 Kosmos 4049 KR 4004 Kreiselmeyer 4015 K-SAT 4217 Kyostar 4001 L&S Electronic 4024 Lasat 4024, 4010, 4008, 4054, 4215, 4212, 4219 Lasonic 4108 Lenco 4024, 4001, 4049, 4215, 4219, 4217 Leng 4013 Lennox 4048 Lenson 4218 Lexus 4053 LG 4103, 4107, 4049 Lifesat 4024, 4008, 4212, 4217 Lifetec 4008 Lorenzen 4219 Lorraine 4049 Lupus 4024, 4008 Luxor 4218 Lyonnaise 4052 Macab 4052 Magnavox 4127, 4101 Manata 4031, 4216, 4217 Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048, 4216 Marantz 4055 Mascom 4010 Maspro 4006, 4217 Matsui 4216 -7- Max Mediabox Mediamarkt Mediasat Medion Medison Mega Memorex Metronic 4219 4213 4011 4009, 4213, 4218 4024, 4008, 4217 4217 4055, 4053 4127 4031, 4028, 4001, 4004, 4005, 4010, 4217 Metz 4015 Micro electronic 4218, 4219, 4217 Micro Technology 4217 MicroGem 4106 Micromaxx 4024, 4008 Microstar 4008 Microtec 4217 Minerva 4015 Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202 Mitsumi 4054 Morgan's 4011, 4054, 4055, 4053, 4217 Motorola 4090, 4091, 4088, 4019 Multichoice 4222 Multitec 4212 Muratto 4049 Mysat 4217 Navex 4013 Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4218, 4219, 4217 Neusat 4217 Next Level 4019 NextWave 4223 Nikko 4011, 4217 Nokia 4006, 4040 Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007, 4010, 4052 Nova 4222 Novis 4013 Oceanic 4051 Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050 Okano 4011 Optex 4048 Optus 4213, 4222, 4223 Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213, 4218 OSat 4004 Otto Versand 4015 Pace 4006, 4015, 4035, 4043, 4047, 4216 Pacific 4051 Packsat 4216 Palcom 4007 Palladium 4011, 4218 Palsat 4212, 4218 Panasat 4222 Panasonic 4121, 4126, 4124, 4006, 4035, 4036, 4221, 4198 Panda 4006, 4219 Pansat 4125 Patriot 4216 Paysat 4127 PCT 4110 Philco 4101 Philips 4071, 4068, 4127, 4006, 4055, 4053, 4061, 4033, 4213, 4216, 4196, 4202, 4203, 4201, 4206 Phoenix 4050 Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048 Pioneer 4046, 4213 Polsat 4052 Predki 4013 Premiere 4048, 4213 Priesner 4011 Primestar 4076 Profile 4216 Promax 4006 Prosat 4007, 4005 Proscan 4093, 4066, 4122, 4197 Protek 4051 Proton 4016 Provision 4010 Quadral Quelle Quiero RadioShack Radiola Radix Rainbow RCA Realistic Redpoint Redstar RFT Roadstar Roch Rover Saba Sabre Sagem Sakura Samsung SAT Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team Satcom Satec Satelco Satford Satmaster Satplus Schneider Schwaiger SCS Seemann SEG Seleco Servi Sat Siemens Silva Skantin Skardin 4024, 4007, 4005, 4008, 4216 4015, 4215, 4219 4052 4019 4055, 4053 4014, 4037 4004 4093, 4066, 4112, 4113, 4118, 4119, 4116, 4122, 4197, 4207 4078 4009 4024, 4008 4005, 4055, 4053 4217 4031 4024, 4217 4010, 4215, 4219, 4216 4006 4023, 4052 4050 4064, 4071, 4069, 4123, 4120, 4003, 4000, 4001, 4032, 4196, 4200 4007, 4218 4223 4001, 4004, 4010, 4013, 4049, 4218 4217 4012, 4219 4217 4024 4012 4012 4212 4008, 4212, 4216 4051, 4212, 4219 4215 4011, 4009, 4014 4024, 4001, 4008, 4013 4048 4031, 4217 4015 4049 4217 4009 Skinsat SKR Skymaster Skymax SkySat Skyvision SM Electronic Smart Sony SR Star Choice Starland Starring Start Trak Strong STS STVI Sumida Sunny Sound Sunsat Sunstar Supermax Tandberg Tandy Tantec TCM Techniland TechniSat Technology Technosat Technowelt Teco Telanor Telasat Telecom Telefunken Teleka Telemaster Telesat Telestar Televes Telewire Tempo Tevion 4218 4217 4017, 4022, 4005, 4212, 4217 4055, 4053 4212, 4218, 4219, 4217 4048 4212, 4217 4215, 4217 4067, 4070, 4213 4011, 4054 4019 4217 4013 4001 4024, 4001, 4004, 4008, 4049, 4222 4115 4031 4011 4024 4217 4024, 4011, 4054 4223 4052 4004 4006 4008 4012 4021, 4026, 4027, 4014, 4053, 4038, 4039, 4212, 4213, 4218 4222 4223 4219 4011, 4054 4007 4215, 4219 4217 4017, 4001, 4216 4004, 4011, 4014, 4218, 4219 4010 4219 4212, 4213, 4218 4006, 4218 4048 4223 4008, 4217 Thomson Thorens Thorn Tivax Tivo Tokai Tonna Toshiba Triad Triasat Triax Turnsat Tvonics Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat Unitor Universum US Digital Variosat Vega Ventana Viewsat Visiosat Voom Vortec Welltech WeTeKom Wevasat Wewa Winersat Wisi Woorisat Worldsat Xrypton XSat Zehnder Zenith Zodiac © 2010 Yamaha Corporation 4020, 4006, 4052, 4058, 4208, 4215, 4213, 4219, 4216, 4217 4051 4006 4104 4196 4053 4006, 4012, 4048, 4218, 4217 4194, 4202, 4203 4049 4218 4015, 4215, 4218, 4217 4217 4214 4031, 4217 4222 4212 4070 4079, 4127 4011, 4050, 4053 4013 4015, 4215, 4219 4016 4015 4024 4055, 4053 4098 4013, 4048, 4216, 4217 4019 4001 4212 4212, 4218 4006 4006 4013 4006, 4014, 4015, 4218, 4219 4010 4216 4024 4217 4024, 4010, 4008, 4209, 4215 4102, 4107, 4195 4004 CD Yamaha 5082, 5095 CD Recorder Yamaha 5083 MD Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086 Tape Yamaha 5084, 5087 Tuner Yamaha 5066, 5071, 5085, 5088, 5090, 5092, 5094 XM Yamaha 5091, 5093 SIRIUS Yamaha 5064, 5067 DOCK Yamaha 5068, 5089 NET Yamaha 5076, 5079 LD Yamaha 2080 Amplifier Yamaha 5019, 5020 YC506C0/RC -8-